Menu

Luke 22:36 — Word Study

Depth

N1904εἶπεν δὲ αὐτοῖς· ἀλλὰ νῦν ἔχων βαλλάντιον ἀράτω, ὁμοίως καὶ πήραν· καὶ μὴ ἔχων πωλησάτω τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀγορασάτω μάχαιραν.

BSAHe saidlegō thenoun to them;autos Butalla nownun [at this present time] the [one]ho [who has the means] havingechō a purseballantion [money bag, wallet] he should take [it],airō likewisehomoiōs [in the same manner] alsokai a bag;pēra [sack, provisions] andkai the [one]ho not havingechō [lacking, not having] he should sellpōleō [give up, exchange] theho cloakhimation [outer garment, mantle] of himautos andkai he should buyagorazō [acquire, purchase, for protection, for defense] a sword.machaira [short sword, dagger]

Word
Listen & take awayLuke 22
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 36 is in this chapter.
Greek ↓ Download MP3 Nestle 1904 — the very text on this page — read by Andy Martin in Erasmian pronunciation.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (machaira) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Luke 22:36quick helps
In a sentenceJesus instructs His disciples to prepare for the challenges ahead by taking provisions and acquiring a sword.
Who is speakingJesus, addressing His disciples directly.
Where we areThis instruction comes during the Last Supper, as Jesus prepares His disciples for His impending crucifixion.
The hard wordμάχαιραν
Take awayPreparation for trials is essential; material provisions and readiness for conflict are emphasized.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Trapp, Ellicott & more — read them › clause subject verbειπεν The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Luke 22:36

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — Instructions for the Coming Trialsgenerated

35Then Jesus asked them, “When I sent you out without purse or bag or sandals, did you lack anything?” “Nothing,” they answered.
36“Now, however,” He told them, “the one with a purse should take it, and likewise a bag; and the one without a sword should sell his cloak and buy one.
37For I tell you that this Scripture must be fulfilled in Me: ‘And He was numbered with the transgressors.’ For what is written about Me is reaching its fulfillment.”
38So they said, “Look, Lord, here are two swords.” “That is enough,” He answered.

Luke 22:36 occurs as Jesus prepares His disciples for the challenges they will face after His departure. He contrasts their previous experience of being sent without provisions with the new reality where they must be equipped for potential danger. This instruction highlights the shift in their mission and the need for preparedness, echoing themes found in other passages, such as Matthew 10:9-10 and John 15:20.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Matthew 10:22–25You will be hated by everyone because of My name, but the one who perseveres to the end will be saved.
2John 15:20Remember the word that I spoke to you: ‘No servant is greater than his master.’ If they persecuted Me, they will persecute you as well; if they kept My word, they will keep yours as well.
3John 16:33I have told you these things so that in Me you may have peace. In the world you will have tribulation. But take courage; I have overcome the world!”
41 Thessalonians 2:14–15For you, brothers, became imitators of the churches of God in Judea that are in Christ Jesus. You suffered from your own countrymen the very things they suffered from the Jews,
51 Thessalonians 3:4Indeed, when we were with you, we kept warning you that we would suffer persecution; and as you know, it has come to pass.

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 6 references, hung on the phrase they belong to


The Key Word μάχαιραν, machairagenerated

The word μάχαιρα, transliterated as machaira, refers to a short sword or dagger used in close combat. It carries connotations of readiness for conflict or defense.

In this context, Jesus instructs His disciples to acquire a sword, indicating the seriousness of the challenges they will face. The imperative form suggests urgency and necessity in their preparedness.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The verse is rendered in the Berean Standard Bible as: 'the one with a purse should take it, and likewise a bag; and the one without a sword should sell his cloak and buy one.' This is consistent across several translations, including the KJV and ASV, which maintain the same essential meaning.

However, some versions differ slightly in their choice of words. The BBE uses 'money-bag' instead of 'purse', while the YLT employs 'having' instead of 'has' in reference to the purse. These variations highlight different nuances in the translations without altering the core message.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb of the verse is εἶπεν, He said, which governs the entire statement. The structure includes several phrases: a noun phrase identifying the subject (the one with a purse), followed by two imperative clauses that instruct what actions to take regarding the purse and sword.

The sentence is complex, with multiple clauses detailing the actions Jesus commands. The flow of the sentence emphasizes the transition from their previous lack of provisions to a new expectation of being prepared.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

The Greek word μάχαιρα appears in the Septuagint, typically translated from the Hebrew word for sword, חֶ֫רֶב. This connection underscores the historical significance of swords in both the Old and New Testaments as symbols of conflict and protection.

The use of μάχαιρα in this verse aligns with its portrayal in the Septuagint, where it often denotes a weapon necessary for survival and defense.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Luke 22:36 shows Jesus telling His disciples to prepare for the challenges ahead by taking a purse and a bag, and if they do not have a sword, to sell their cloak to buy one. This instruction highlights the importance of being ready for what is to come.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does Jesus mean by telling His disciples to buy a sword?

Jesus is emphasizing the need for preparedness in the face of upcoming trials and opposition, indicating that they must be ready to defend themselves.

Why does Jesus mention taking a purse and a bag?

These items symbolize the need for material provisions and readiness for their mission, contrasting with their earlier experiences when they were sent out without such supplies.

Is the instruction to buy a sword a literal command?

While the command is literal, it also serves as a metaphor for the spiritual and physical readiness required in the face of persecution and challenges.

How does this verse connect to the overall theme of preparation in the New Testament?

This verse reflects the broader New Testament theme of being prepared for trials and challenges, as seen in other teachings of Jesus and the apostles.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. In what ways can I prepare myself spiritually for challenges I may face?
  2. How can I ensure that I am equipped to support others in times of need?
  3. What does it mean for me to 'take up my sword' in a metaphorical sense in my daily life?
  4. How can I apply the principle of preparedness in my own circumstances?

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Luke 22:36 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

Then said he unto them,.... That is, Jesus said unto them, as the Persic version expresses it: but now he that hath a purse let him take it, and likewise his scrip; signifying hereby, that from this

Read John Gill on Luke 22 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

Then said he unto them, But now, he that hath a purse, let him take it, and likewise his scrip: and he that hath no sword, let him sell his garment, and buy one.

Read Robert Jamieson on Luke 22 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

36 Then said he unto them, But now, he that hath a purse, let him take it, and likewise his scrip: and he that hath no sword, let him sell his garment, and buy one. Ver. 36. But now he that hath, &c.] Here the Captain of our salvation cries, Arm, arm; and under the name and notion of corporal weapons he intends all manner of spiritual preparations.

Read John Trapp on Luke 22 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(36) He that hath a purse, let him take it.—The word for “purse” is the same as in Luke 10:4, where see Note. On “scrip,” see Note on Matthew 10:10. If the words had stopped short of the “sword,” we could have received their literal meaning without difficulty. They would have seemed to counsel the prudence which provides for want, instead of a simple trust, as before, in the providence of God, and so would have sanctioned all equitable forms of Church organisation and endowment. The mention of the “sword,” however, introduces a new element of thought. Our Lord’s words to Peter (Matthew 26:52) show that the disciples were not meant to use it in His defence. It is not likely that He would…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Luke 22 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 36. He that hath no sword] Bishop PEARCE supposes that the word μαχαιραν, sword, has been inserted here from what is said in Lu 22:38, as it is evident our Lord never intended to make any resistance, or to suffer a sword to be used on the occasion; see Matthew 26:52. The word stands rather oddly in the passage: the verse, translated in the order in which it stands, is as follows: And he who hath none, let him sell his garment and buy - a sword. Now it is plain that the verb πωλησατω, let him buy, may be referred to πηραν a scrip, in the former part of the verse: therefore if, according to the bishop's opinion, the word sword be omitted, the passage may be understood thus: "When I sent…

Read AdamClarke on Luke 22 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

36. But now] This was an intimation of their totally changed relation to the world. There was no spontaneous hospitality, no peaceful acceptance, no honoured security, to be looked for now.he that hath no sword, let him sell his garment, and buy one] Rather, lie that hath not (either purse or scrip to buy a sword with), let him, &c. Of course the expression was not meant to be taken with unintelligent literalness. It was in accordance with that kind metaphorical method of expression which our blessed Lord adopted that His words might never be forgotten. It was to warn them of days of hatred and opposition in which self-defence might become a daily necessity, though not aggression. To infer…

Read Cambridge on Luke 22 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

But now - The Saviour says the times are changed. “Before,” he sent them out only for a little time. They were in their own country.

Read Albert Barnes on Luke 22 →
Daniel Denison Whedon1808–1885Whedon's Commentary on the Bible

36. But now—Childhood is past, and the divine order is, that your powers be developed into the efficiency of manhood. You are like adventurers that must go forth to travel and battle upon your own resources.

Read Daniel Denison Whedon on Luke 22 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

“Now, however,” He told them, “the one with a purse should take it, and likewise a bag; and the one without a sword should sell his cloak and buy one.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

Then he said to them, “But now, whoever has a purse, let him take it, and likewise a bag. Whoever has none, let him sell his cloak, and buy a sword.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

“Now, however,” He told them, “the one with a purse should take it, and likewise a bag; and the one without a sword should sell his cloak and buy one.

NETBNew English Translation2006

He said to them, “But now, the one who has a money bag must take it, and likewise a traveler’s bag too. And the one who has no sword must sell his cloak and buy one.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

Then said he unto them, But now, he that hath a purse, let him take it, and likewise his scrip: and he that hath no sword, let him sell his garment, and buy one.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

And he said unto them, But now, he that hath a purse, let him take it, and likewise a wallet; and he that hath none, let him sell his cloak, and buy a sword.

RVARevised Version, American1894

And he said unto them, But now, he that hath a purse, let him take it, and likewise a wallet: and he that hath none, let him sell his cloke, and buy a sword.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

Then said he to them, But now he that hath a purse, let him take it , and likewise his sack: and he that hath no sword, let him sell his garment, and buy one.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

Then he said to them, But nowe he that hath a bagge, let him take it, and likewise a scrip: and hee that hath none, let him sell his coate, and buy a sworde.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

He said therefore to them, But now he that has a purse let him take [it], in like manner also a scrip, and he that has none let him sell his garment and buy a sword;

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

Then said he to them, 'But, now, he who is having a bag, let him take [it] up, and in like manner also a scrip; and he who is not having, let him sell his garment, and buy a sword,

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

Then He said to them, “But now, he who is having a bag, let him take [it] up, and in like manner also a leather pouch; and he who is not having, let him sell his garment, and buy a sword,

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

Then he said to them, “But now, the one who has a purse, let him take it, and also a bag of provisions. The one who does not have a sword should sell his cloak and buy one.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

But they said: Nothing. Then said he unto them: But now he that hath a purse, let him take it, and likewise a scrip; and he that hath not, let him sell his coat, and buy a sword.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

“But now, if you have money you should take it, as well as a bag, and if you don't have a sword, sell your cloak and buy one.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

And he said to them, But now, he who has a money-bag, or a bag for food, let him take it: and he who has not, let him give his coat for money and get a sword.

Word by word, the decisions they made

εἶπενlegō He said G2036 3 different renderings
he saidASV BBE DBY GNV LSV NETB RVA ULB WEB
saidKJV NWB YLT
they saidDRA
ἔχωνechō having G2192 4 different renderings
hasBBE DBY NETB WEB
havingLSV YLT
haveULB
you haveFBV
βαλλάντιονballantion a purse G905 2 different renderings
a purseASV BSB DBY DRA KJV MSB NWB RVA ULB WEB
money bagBBE NETB
πήραν·pēra a bag; G4082 3 different renderings
bagBBE BSB FBV LSV MSB NETB WEB YLT
sackNWB
provisionsULB
ἔχωνechō having G2192 4 different renderings
hasBBE DBY NETB WEB
not havingLSV YLT
haveULB
you haveFBV
ἱμάτιονhimation cloak G2440 2 different renderings
cloakASV BSB FBV MSB NETB ULB WEB
garmentDBY KJV LSV NWB YLT

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseδὲthenclauseverbεἶπενHe saidindirect objectαὐτοῖςto themclauseἈλλὰButclauseclauseadverbialνῦνnownoun phrase · subjectthe [one]clauseverbἔχωνhavingobjectβαλλάντιονa purseverbἀράτωlet him take [it]clauseadverbialὁμοίωςlikewisenoun phrase · objectκαὶalsoπήρανa bagκαὶandclauseclausenoun phrase · subjectthe [one]clauseadverbialμὴnotverbἔχωνhavingverbπωλησάτωlet him sellnoun phrase · objectτὸthenoun phraseἱμάτιονcloakαὐτοῦof himκαὶandclauseverbἀγορασάτωbuy [one]objectμάχαιρανa sword

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

At illi dixerunt : Nihil. Dixit ergo eis : Sed nunc qui habet sacculum, tollat ; similiter et peram : et qui non habet, vendat tunicam suam et emat gladium.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܐܡܪ ܠܗܘܢ ܡܢ ܗܫܐ ܡܢ ܕܐܝܬ ܠܗ ܟܝܣܐ ܢܣܒ ܘܗܟܢܐ ܐܦ ܬܪܡܠܐ ܘܡܢ ܕܠܝܬ ܠܗ ܣܝܦܐ ܢܙܒܢ ܢܚܬܗ ܘܢܙܒܢ ܠܗ ܣܝܦܐ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

εἶπεν δὲ αὐτοῖς· ἀλλὰ νῦν ἔχων βαλλάντιον ἀράτω, ὁμοίως καὶ πήραν· καὶ μὴ ἔχων πωλησάτω τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀγορασάτω μάχαιραν.

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

εἶπεν δὲ αὐτοῖς· ἀλλὰ νῦν ἔχων βαλλάντιον ἀράτω, ὁμοίως καὶ πήραν· καὶ μὴ ἔχων πωλησάτω τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀγορασάτω μάχαιραν.

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

εἶπεν δὲ αὐτοῖς· ἀλλὰ νῦν ἔχων βαλλάντιον ἀράτω, ὁμοίως καὶ πήραν· καὶ μὴ ἔχων πωλησάτω τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀγορασάτω μάχαιραν.

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

εἶπεν δὲ αὐτοῖς· ἀλλὰ νῦν ἔχων βαλλάντιον ἀράτω, ὁμοίως καὶ πήραν· καὶ μὴ ἔχων πωλησάτω τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀγορασάτω μάχαιραν.

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

εἶπεν δὲ αὐτοῖς· ἀλλὰ νῦν ἔχων βαλλάντιον ἀράτω, ὁμοίως καὶ πήραν· καὶ μὴ ἔχων πωλησάτω τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀγορασάτω μάχαιραν.

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

εἶπεν δὲ αὐτοῖς· ἀλλὰ νῦν ἔχων βαλλάντιον ἀράτω, ὁμοίως καὶ πήραν· καὶ μὴ ἔχων πωλησάτω τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀγορασάτω μάχαιραν.

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

εἶπεν αὐτοῖς· ἀλλὰ νῦν ἔχων βαλλάντιον ἀράτω, ὁμοίως καὶ πήραν· καὶ μὴ ἔχων τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ καὶ μάχαιραν.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

εἶπεν αὐτοῖς· ἀλλὰ νῦν ἔχων βαλλάντιον ἀράτω, ὁμοίως καὶ πήραν· καὶ μὴ ἔχων πωλησάτω τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀγορασάτω μάχαιραν.

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
δὲ thenNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, TregTR, Byz
πωλησάτω he should sellNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TRByz
ἀγορασάτω he should buyNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TRByz

Apparatus — SBL Greek New Testament, CC BY 4.0


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Luke 22:36ειπενHe saidHe saidειπενδέthenthenδέαὐτόςto them;to them;αὐτόςἀλλάButButἀλλάνῦνnownowνῦνthe [one]the [one]ἔχωhavinghavingἔχωβαλλάντιονa pursea purseβαλλάντιοναἴρωhe should the should take αἴρωὁμοίωςlikewiselikewiseὁμοίωςκαίalsoalsoκαίπήραa bag;a bag;πήρακαίandandκαίthe [one]the [one]μήnotnotμήἔχωhavinghavingἔχωπωλέωhe should she should sellπωλέωthetheἱμάτιονcloakcloakἱμάτιοναὐτόςof himof himαὐτόςκαίandandκαίἀγοράζωhe should bhe should buyἀγοράζωμάχαιραa sword.a sword.μάχαιραεἶπονv. I say, v. I say, speakεἶπονἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦβάλλωv. I cast,v. I cast, throβάλλωὅμοιοςAdj like, Adj like, similὅμοιοςἀγοράn.f. marken.f. market-plaἀγοράἄλλοςAdj other,Adj other, anotἄλλοςνυνίAdv now, aAdv now, alreadνυνίοὐNeg.prt. nNeg.prt. no, noοὐμάχηn.f. strifn.f. strife, coμάχηἐπερωτάωv. I interv. I interrogatἐπερωτάωχρείαn.f. need,n.f. need, neceχρείακακῶςAdv badly,Adv badly, evilκακῶςμόνοςAdv alone,Adv alone, but,μόνοςἐμαυτοῦRefl.pr. oRefl.pr. of mysἐμαυτοῦἐλεέωv. I pity,v. I pity, haveἐλεέωποτέDisj.prt. Disj.prt. at onποτέπήραn.f. a sacn.f. a sack, waπήρα
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Luke 22:36

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
εἶπενlegō He said G2036 Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
1,988× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Tyndale gloss
to say
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — λαλέω, λέγω, λαλιά, λόγος from a scan

In dealing with synonyms of the N. T. we plainly need not concern ourselves with such earlier, or even contemporary, uses of the words which we are discriminating, as lie altogether outside of the N. T. sphere, when these uses do not illustrate, and have not affected, their Scriptural employment. It follows from this that all those contemptuous uses of λαλεῖν as to talk at random, as one ἀθυρόστομος, or with no door to his lips, might do; of λαλιά, as chatter («Kpacia λόγου ἄλογος, Plato, Defin. 416)—for I cannot believe that we are to find this at John iv. 42—may be dismissed and set aside. The antithesis in the line of Eupolis (Meineke, /ragm. Com. Gr. p. 174), Λαλεῖν ἄριστος, ἀδυνατώτατος λέγειν, does little or nothing to illustrate the matter in hand. The distinction which indeed exists between the words may in this way be made clear. There are two leading aspects under which speech…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λέγω,

[in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Ge 22:16, al.;]

in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount.

In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Ac 13:15 24:10; seq. orat. dir., Mt 9:34, Mk 3:11, Jo 1:29, al.; seq. ὅτι recit., Mk 3:21, Lk 1:24, Jo 6:14, al.; acc. et. inf., Lk 11:18, Jo 12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mt 11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λέγω (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and pres. pass. are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. ἔλεγαν, Jn. xi. 56 Tdf. [ef. ἔχω, init.]): I. in its earliest use in Hom. to lay (like Lat. lego, Germ. legen; οἵ. J. G. Miiller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 127 sqq.; Curtius § 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep; 1. to collect, gather; to pick out. 2. lo lay with, count with; to enumerate, recount, narrate, describe; [οἷ. Eng. tale, Germ. ztihlen). II. to put word to word in speaking, join words together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. λαλεῖν, see under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in 1]. 2, 222 [yet ef. Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48, 2; L. and S. s. vy. B. II. 2]; often in Pind., and by far the most com. use in Attic; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for 728; often also for D8} (saying, dictum); very rarely for 1393; and soin N.T. 1. univ. a. absol. to…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λέγω. (1). “‘I say, speak”: see e.g. P Par 47 {= Selections, Ῥ- 21 ff.), ¢. B.C. 153, which is addressed on the verso—mpds τοὺς τὴν ἀλήθεαν λέγοντες (—-as), P Fay 12378 (c. A.D. 100) γνώσομαι yap εἰ ἀληθῶς λέγι, “1 will find out whether he is speaking the truth,” P Ryl 11. 7615 (late li/A.D.) ἃ καὶ ἀναγνώσομαι λεγομένου τοῦ [π]ράγματος, “1 will read them when the case is argued” (Edd.), P Flor II. 1327 (A.D. 257) ἔλεζξ]αν πεποιηκέναι ταῦτα ἀγνοίᾳ, ‘they said they had done this in ignorance,” and the magical P Par 5741238 (iii/A.D.) (= Selectzons, p. 113) λόγος λεγόμενος ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, ‘ invocation to be uttered over the head (of the possessed one).”” For the phrase τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν, cf. I Cor 11°, Weiss (Meyer 15 ad 1) cites a sepulchral inscr. of husband and wife from Rhodes, /J/Ae 149 (ii/B.c.) ταὐτὰ λέγοντες ταὐτὰ φρονοῦντες ἤλθομεν τὰν ἀμέτρητον ὁδὸν εἰς ᾿Αἴδαν. (2). Closely…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἶπον (eipon) — to say.

εἶπον

(present ἔπω is used by [Refs 2nd c.BC+]present in use is φημί, λέγω, ἀγορεύω (see. infr. IV), the future ἐρέω, ἐρῶ, the perfect εἴρηκα), Epic dialect and Lyric poetry ἔειπον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; subjunctive εἴπω (Epic dialect εἴπωμι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; optative εἴποιμ; infinitive εἰπεῖν, Epic dialect -έμεναι, -έμεν, [Refs]; participle εἰπών: also aorist 1 εἶπα (ἔειπα [Refs 5th c.BC+] as I said, [Refs 1st c.BC+] mostly in Ionic dialect Prose, also [Refs 4th c.BC+], and the 2nd pers. indicative and imperative of this form are preferred in Attic dialect, 2nd pers. singular indicative εἶπας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; imperative εἶπον (on the accent see[Refs 5th c.BC+], -ατον, -ατ; 3rd.pers. plural εἶπαν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; participle εἴπας [Refs 4th c.BC+], Aeolic dialect εἴπαις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in compounds middle ἀπείπασθαι (which see), διείπασθαι (which see)…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

λέγω

epo

a primary verb (used only in the definite past tense, the others being

borrowed from 2046, 4483, and 5346); to speak or say (by word or

writing):--answer, bid, bring word, call, command, grant, say (on),

speak, tell. Compare 3004.

see GREEK for 2046

see GREEK for 4483

see GREEK for 5346

see GREEK for 3004

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λέγω legō 2x

to lay, to arrange, to gather; to say, Mt. 1:20; to speak, make an address or speech, Acts 26:1; to say mentally, in thought, Mt. 3:9; Lk. 3:8; to say in written language, Mk. 15:28; Lk. 1:63; Jn. 19:37; to say, as distinguished from acting, Mt. 23:3; to mention, speak of, Mk. 14:71; Lk. 9:31; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἔπω εἶπον prob. made up by Nicander as present of εἶπον. to say, Nicander.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAI-3S — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
second aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
39%said
said39% · 372×he said27% · 260×they said7% · 67×having said4% · 40×other renderings15% · 143×other renderings8% · 73×

955 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 73 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
δὲoun then G1161 Conjunction
2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.
Tyndale gloss
then
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%now
now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand
εἰCond
παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist
εἰμίI am, exist
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche
οὗτος
δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t
δέthen2787×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theσύ
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn
τὶς
Article theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
αὐτοῖς·autos to them; G846 Personal pronoun · dative · plural · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-DPM — Personal pronoun · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-DPM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςto them;5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
ἀλλὰalla But G235 Conjunction
638× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Luke than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
But is a strong opposing word, used in Matthew 5:15 and John 7:16. It shows contrast or surprise, like in the phrase 'but God' in Romans 3:31.
Tyndale gloss
but
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀλλά (alla) is an adversative particle, meaning 'but' or 'otherwise.' It is derived from the neuter plural of ἄλλος and is used to introduce opposition or contrast in sentences. In the New Testament, it often appears in contexts that involve negation or exceptions, such as in Matthew 5:15 and John 16:2. The lexicons note its stronger adversative force compared to δέ.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀλλά (ἀλλ’ usually bef. α and υ, often bef. ε and η, rarely bef. ο and ω, never bef. ι; Tdf., Pr., 93 f.; WH, App., 146),

adversative particle,

stronger than δέ; prop. neuter pl. of ἄλλος, used adverbially, with changed accent; hence prop. otherwise, on the other hand (cf. Ro 3:31);

opposing a previous negation, but: οὐ (μὴ) . . . ἀ., Mt 5:15, 17 Mk 5:39, Jo 7:16, al.; rhetorically subordinating but not entirely negativing what precedes, οὐ . . . ἀ., not so much . . . as, Mk 9:37, Mt 10:20, Jo 12:44, al.; with ellipse of the negation, Mt 11:7-9

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀλλά, an adversative particle, derived from ἄλλα, neut. of the adj. ἄλλος, which was originally pronounced ἀλλός (cf. Klotz ad Dévar. ii. p. 1 sq.), hence properly, other things se. than those just mentioned. It differs from δέ, as the Lat. at and sed from autem, [ef. W. 441 sq. (411)]. 1. But. So related to the preceding words that it serves to introduce 1. an opposition to concessions; nevertheless, notwithstanding: Mt. xxiv. 6; Mk. xiii. 20; xiv. 28; Jn. xvi. 7, 20; Acts iv. 17; vii. 48; Ro. v. 14 sq.; x. 16; 1 Co. iv. 4; 2 Co. vii. 6; Phil. ii. 27 (ἀλλ᾽ ὁ θεός etc.), ete. 2. an objection: Jn. vii. 27; Ro. x. 18 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 35; Jas. ii. 18. 3. an exception: Lk. xxii. 53; Ro. iv. 2; 1 Co. viii. 7; xe 29: 4. a restriction: Jn. xi. 42; Gal. iv. 8; Mk. xiv. 36. 5. an ascensive transition or gradation, nay rather, yea moreover: Jn. xvi. 2; 2 Co. i. 9; esp. with καί added, Lk. xii. 7…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀλλά. The closeness οἱ ἀλλά to πλήν appears in more uses than one. Armitage Robinson, Zp/estans, p. 205, has a note on a quasi-resumpltive use of ἀλλά in Eph 524 which is closely paralleled by that of πλήν in ver. 33. Then there are instances of ἀλλά = ‘‘except.” ‘This is clear where we have ἀλλ᾽ ἤ (as in 2 Cor 13%): thus P Petr 11. 9 (3)® (B.c. 24139) ὥστε μηθένα εἶναι ἐνταῦθα ἀλλ᾽ ἢ ἡμᾶς, ‘ There is no one left here except ourselves” (Ed.), 2d. 46 (α)" (B.C. 209) καὶ μὴ ὑποκεῖσθαι πρὸς ἄλλο μηδὲν add’ ἢ τὴν mpoyeypap[μέν]ην ἐγγύην, “has not been pledged for any other purpose than the aforesaid security” (1α.), P Lond 89738 (a.p. 84) (=TIII. p. 207) ὃ μέντοιγε οὐ θέλων. ἀλλὰ ἢ ἀνάγκηι. In P Tebt I. το 419 (B.c. 92) μὴ ἐξέστω Φιλίσκωι γυναῖκα ἄλλην. μ γυ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀλλά (alla) — but.

ἀλλά,

conjunction, originally neuter plural of ἄλλος, otheruise: used adversatively to limit or oppose words, sentences, or clauses, stronger than δέ:

I. in simple oppositions, but,

I.1. after negative clauses, οὐ κακός, ἀλλ᾽ ἀγαθός[Refs 8th c.BC+]

I.1. b after a simple negative, ἦ παραφρονεῖ; οὔκ, ἀλλ᾽ ὕπνος μ᾽ ἔχει[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.1. c frequently after οὐ μόνον, μὴ μόνον, with or without καί, οὐ μόνον ἅπαξ, ἀ. πολλάκις[Refs 5th c.BC+], either, not only.. but.., μὴ ὅτι ἰδιώτην τινά, ἀλλὰ τὸν μέγαν βασιλέα[Refs 5th c.BC+]; or, not only not.. but.., οὐχ ὅπως κωλυταὶ.. γενήσεσθε, ἀλλὰ καὶ.. περιόψεσθε[Refs 5th c.BC+]; the negative form is ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, μὴ ὅτι ὑπὲρ ἄλλου, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ ὑπὲρ ἐμαυτοῦ δίκην εἴρηκα[Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀλλά

alla

neuter plural of 243; properly, other things, i.e. (adverbially)

contrariwise (in many relations):--and, but (even), howbeit, indeed,

nay, nevertheless, no, notwithstanding, save, therefore, yea, yet.

see GREEK for 243

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀλλά

Cj.

but, except

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀλλά alla 638x

but; however; but still more; ἀλλάγε, at all events; ἀλλή, unless, except. Ἀλλά also serves to introduce a sentence with keenness and emphasis, Jn. 16:2; Rom. 6:5; 7:7; Phil. 3:8

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀλλά Conjunct., properly neut. pl. of ἄλλος (with changed accent) otherwise, but, stronger than δέ:

to oppose single clauses, but, Lat. autem, the preceding clause being negat., οὐ μόνον ἅπαξ, ἀλλὰ πολλάκις Plat.; so, οὐχ (or μὴ) ὅτι, οὐχ (or μὴ) ὅπως, are followed by ἀλλά or ἀλλά καὶ . . . , not only . . . , but . . .

after a negative ἀλλά sometimes = ἀλλ᾽ ἤ, except, but, ἔπαισεν οὔτις ἀλλ᾽ ἐγώ Soph.

to oppose whole sentences, but, yet, Lat. at:— used by Hom., with imperat. or subj., to remonstrate, encourage, persuade, like Lat. tandem, ἀλλ᾽ ἴθι, ἀλλ᾽ ἄγε, ἀλλὰ ἴωμεν, Hom.

joined with other Particles, ἀλλ᾽ ἄρα, or, ἀλλ᾽ οὖν, but then, however, Hdt., etc.

ἀλλὰ γάρ, Lat. enimvero, but really, certainly, attic

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
92%but
but92% · 591×instead2% · 15×other renderings4% · 25×other renderings2% · 12×

643 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial10%object6%predicate3%subject2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 638 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
οἶδαI know, rememberκατεργάζομαιI work out, prodἐπιγινώσκωI come to know,
σύ
λέγωI say, speakγράφωI writeἐν
ἐγώ
ἀπόκρατέωI lay hold of, oθέλημαwill, wish, desi
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegοὐδείςno one, none, noΜωϋσῆςMoses
θεόςGod, a god
Article theἄνομοςlawless, sinful,
ἀλλάBut638×
what comes after →
Article the
Article theπέμπωI sendθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ἐν
οὐNeg
πᾶςall, the whole, ἐνδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ἐν
πᾶςall, the whole, Article theδύναμιςmight, power, ma
ἵναin order that, so th
φανερόωI make clear, viπληρόωI fill, fulfill,σῴζωI save, heal

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀλλά · 638× in the New Testament
John 1 Corinthians Romans 2 Corinthians Mark Matthew Luke Acts Galatians 1 Peter Hebrews Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 5c. AD 40

οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.1c. AD 75–95

Τοῖς τὰς ἱστορίας συγγράφειν βουλομένοις οὐ μίαν οὐδὲ τὴν αὐτὴν ὁρῶ τῆς σπουδῆς γινομένην αἰτίαν, ἀλλὰ πολλὰς καὶ πλεῖστον ἀλλήλων διαφερούσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.8c. AD 100

ἐγὼ δὲ οὐχ ὡς διδάσκαλος, ἀλλ̓ ὧς εἰς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑποδείξω ὀλίγα, δἰ ὧν ἐν τοῖς παροῦσιν εὐφρανθήσεσθε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P. Grenf. 1 21Pathyris127 BC

ἐπὶ Διονυσίου ἀγορανόμου ἐν τῶι ϛ ἔτους ἐπὶ τοῦ Φιλομήτορος, ἣ διασαφεῖ τά τε ἄλλα καὶ ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ

P.Grenf. 1 44Pathyris127 BC

ἐπὶ Διονυσίου ἀγορανόμου ἐν τῶι ϛ ἔτει ἐπὶ τοῦ Φιλομήτορος ἣ διασαφεῖ τά τε ἄλλα καὶ ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ

P.Grenf. 1 37Thebais109 BC

νῦν οὐδενός … ς ἀξιοῦμεν … ἀνθρώπου ἀλόγως … ὀφείλει ἡμῖν διάφορα … θαι ἀλλʼ ἀποστερέσαι … ησας ἀλλά … τας κατὰ κοινόν … ἐπίσκεψιν ποιησάσθαι. … τούτων γὰρ

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
νῦνnun now G3568 Adverb
148× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Now refers to the present time, as in John 4:18 and Romans 13:11. It's used to emphasize a current situation or action.
Amplified meaning
at this present time
Tyndale gloss
now
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

νῦν is an adverb meaning 'now,' indicating the present time as opposed to the past or future. It can also refer to the immediate past or future. The New Testament uses it frequently, including in John 11:8 and Romans 13:11. Abbott-Smith notes its use in logical sequences, while Liddell-Scott-Jones highlights its dialectal variations and broader applications.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

νῦν, adv.,

[in LXX chiefly for עַתָּה;]

prop., of time, now, i.e. at the present time: as opp. to past, Jo 4:18, Ac 7:52, Ro 13:11, II Co 7:9, Col 1:24, al.; opp. to fut., Jo 12:27, Ro 11:31, al.; c. art., ὁ (ἡ, τὸ) et subst., the present: Ro 3:26, Ga 4:25, I Ti 6:17, Tit 2:12, al.; ἀπὸ τοῦ ν. (LXX for מֵעַתָּה), Lk 1:48, Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

νῦν (nun) — now.

νῦν

(for νυν, νυ, see infr. II), adverb now, both of the present moment, and of the present time generally, οἳ ν. βροτοί εἰσιν mortals of our day, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; so in Ionic dialect and Attic dialect, οἱ ν. [ἄνθρωποι] men of the present day, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ ν. τρόπος, τὸ ν. βαρβαρικόν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Βοιωτοὶ οἱ ν.[Refs 5th c.BC+]the present, [LXX+5th c.BC+]; μέχρι ν. (variant{μ. τοῦ ν}.) [Refs 1st c.BC+]; τὰ ν. simply, ={ν}., [NT+5th c.BC+]

2. of the immediate past, just now, but now, ν. Μενέλαος ἐνίκησεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]

3. of the future, presently, ν. αὖτ᾽ ἐγχείῃ πειρήσομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare νῦν δή, νυνί.

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

νῦν

nun

a primary particle of present time; "now" (as adverb of date, a

transition or emphasis); also as noun or adjective present or

immediate:--henceforth, + hereafter, of late, soon, present, this

(time). See also 3569, 3570.

see GREEK for 3569

see GREEK for 3570

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

νῦν

Adv

now, already, at present

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

νῦν nyn 147x

now, at the present time, Mk. 10:30; Lk. 6:21, et al. freq.; just now, Jn. 11:8; forthwith, Jn. 12:31; καὶ νῦν, even now, as matters stand, Jn. 11:22; now, expressive of a marked tone of address, Acts 7:34; 13:11; Jas. 4:13; 5:1; τὸ νῦν, the present time, Lk. 1:48; τανῦν, or τὰ νῦν, now, Acts 4:29

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
87%now
now87% · 129×present7% · 11×now on2% · 3×other renderings4% · 6×

149 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial93%predicate4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 148 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἀπόἐνκαίand, even, also,
καίand, even, also, nam
ὥραan hour, seasonαὐτόςἔρχομαιI come, go
δέbut, on the other ha
φανερόωI make clear, viπῶςὅς
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
μάρτυςa witnessαὐτόςσύ
ὅς
δίκαιοςjust, righteous,διάἐπί
νῦνnow148×
what comes after →
δέbut, on the other ha
καίand, even, also,Article theἐλεέωI pity, have mer
Article the
ἔχωI have, hold, poψυχήthe soul, life, ἄρχωνa ruler, prince,
καίand, even, also, nam
εἰςοὐNegφέρωI carry, bear, b
καιρόςfitting season, oppo
εἰςπρόςλεῖμμαa remnant, remai
ἐν
Article theπαρρησίαfreedom, confide

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceνῦν · 148× in the New Testament
John Acts Luke Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Hebrews 1 Peter Philippians 1 John Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament24 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 257 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 134c. AD 40

ἐναργέστατα καὶ διὰ τούτου παρίστησιν ὅτι διαφορὰ παμμεγέθης ἐστὶ τοῦ τε νῦν πλασθέντος ἀνθρώπου καὶ τοῦ κατὰ τὴν εἰκόνα θεοῦ γεγονότος πρότερον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.1c. AD 100

φύγωμεν οὑν τελείως ἀπὸ πάντων τῶν ἔργων τῆς ἀνομίας, μήποτε καταλάβῃ ἡμᾶς τὰ ἔργα τῆς ἀνομίας: καὶ μισήσωμεν τὴν πλάνην τοῦ νῦν καιροῦ, ἵνα εἰς τὸν μέλλοντα ἀγαπηθῶμεν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC

τάξασθαι … ὠνητὴν τῶν ὑπογεγραμμένων μοι ἐγγαίων Ἐσθλάδαν Δρύτωνος διαγράφειν τοῖς ἀνδράσι· τὰ δὲ νῦν ἐποικονομ … διὸ ἀξιῶ, ἐὰν φαίνηται, συντάξαι ἐγδοθῆναι αὐτῶι τὴν καθήκουσαν διαγραφήν. οὗ καὶ

γράφω περὶ τοῦ διανδραγαθήσαντα σαυτοῦ ἐπιμέλεσθαι μέχρι τοῦ τὰ πράγματα ἀποκαταστῆναι , ἔτι καὶ νῦν καλῶς ποιήσεις παρακαλῶν σαυτὸν καὶ τοὺς παρʼ ἡμῶν· προσπέπτωκεν γὰρ Παῶν ἀναπλεῖν ἐν τῶι

P.Grenf. 1 37Thebais109 BC

γε… ς δεομένων δὲ τῶν … ντων ὑμῶν διαλήψεως … καὶ οὐδὲ μέχρι τοῦ νῦν οὐδενός … ς ἀξιοῦμεν … ἀνθρώπου ἀλόγως … ὀφείλει ἡμῖν διάφορα … θαι ἀλλʼ

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
ho the [one] G3588 Article · nominative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Amplified meaning
who has the means
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

wun.

See NUMBER.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the [one]19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
ἔχωνechō having G2192 Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
709× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means to have or hold something, like a possession or ability. It is used in many ways, such as having power or being with someone. The Bible uses it in Revelation 5:8 and 14:6.
Tyndale gloss
to have/be
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔχω, transliterated as echō, means 'to have' or 'to hold' and is used in various contexts, including possession, ability, and condition. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often relating to physical possession or metaphorical concepts like keeping faith or emotions. Notably, it can also refer to being pregnant, as seen in Matthew 1:18. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔχω,

[in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), בַּעַל, יֵשׁ, etc., 59 words in all;]

(on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, v. M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183),

to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions.

Trans.;

to have, hold, hold fast, etc.;

to hold, as, in the hand: Re 5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Re 1:16 10:2, al.;

of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mt 3:4 22:12, al.; so freq. pres. ptcp. (LS, s.v., A, I, 6; Bl., § 74, 2), Mk 11:13, Jo 18:10, Re 9:17, al.;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔχω ; fut. ἕξω ; impf. εἶχον, [1 pers. plur. εἴχαμεν, 2 Jn. ἔχω 266 5 T Tr WH], 8 pers. plur. εἶχαν (Mk. viii. 7 L T Tr WH; Rey. ix. 8 LT Tr WH; but ef. [ Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 38; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 165]; B. 40 (35)) and εἴχοσαν (LT Tr WH in Jn. xv. 22, 24; but ef. Bitm. in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. 1858, pp. 485 sqq. 491; see his N. T. Gr. p. 43 (37); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 39; Τὰ Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 165; ef. δολεόω ]) ; pres. mid. ptep. ἐχόμενος ; to have,—with 2 aor. act. ἔσχον; pf. ἔσχηκα; I. Transitively. have (hold) in the hand: τὶ ἐν τῇ χειρί, Rev. i. 16; vi. 5; x. 2; xvii. 4; and simply, Rev. v. 8; viii. 3, 6; xiv. 6, ete.; Heb. viii. 3. Ὁ. in the sense of wearing (Lat. gestare) ; of garments, arms and the like: τὸ ἔνδυμα, Mt. iii. 4; xxii. 12; κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων, sc. τί, having a covering hanging down from the head, i.e. having the head covered [B. $130, 5; W. §…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔχω. It may be well to illustrate some of the less usual forms of this common verb. The future σχήσω (cf. Kithner-Blass Gr. 1. ii. p. 112 n.8) is restored by the editor in OGZS 751° (ii/ B.C.) ἐπεὶ θλιβέντες ἐμ πλείοσιν ἀσθενῶς [σχή]σετε. For the 2 aor. with 1 aor. termination (cf. Ac 757 D συνἐσχαν) see BGU 11. 4518 (i/ii A.D.) ἀναγκαίως ἔσχαμεν δ[ι7᾽ ἐπιστολῆς σε ἀσπάσεσθαι, and for ἔσχοσαν cf. OG/S 315°" (B.C. 164-159) ὑφοψίαν μοχθηράν, ἣν Kal περὶ Tod ἀδελφοῦ ἔσχοσαν. In 20. 2237 (iii/B.c.) we have αὐτοὶ ἀπολογισάμενοι περί τε τῆς εὐνοίας ἣν διὰ παντὸς εἰσχήκατε εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν οἰκίαν, and for similar forms see the editor's note ® to 2b. 323. For the trans. use of the verb see such passages as P Oxy IV. 743!® (B.c. 2) εἰ καὶ m[p]ds ἄλλους εἶχον πρᾶγμα, βοηθὸν αὐτοῦ γ[εἸνέσθαι διὰ ἣν ἔχομε(ν) πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς φιλίαν, BGU I. 228(a.p. 114) (= «ϑελδείζογις, p. 74), which illustrate 1 Cor…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔχω (echō) — to have/be.

ἔχω,

__A2nd pers. singular ἔχεισθα conjecture in [Refs 7th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular subjunctive ἔχῃσθα [Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect εἶχον, Epic dialect ἔχον [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect and poetry ἔχεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]future ἕξω, Epic dialect infinitive ἑξέμεναι [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (of momentary action, especially in sense check, see below [Refs 4th c.BC+], not found in Attic dialect Inscrr. or [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular σχήσησθα [Refs]aorist 1 ἔσχης α falsa lectio in [Refs 3rd c.AD+]aorist 2 ἔσχον, imperative σχές [Refs 5th c.BC+] only in Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; subjunctive σχῶ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural σχοίησαν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive σχεῖν [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect σχέμεν [Refs] (in Alexandr. Gr. 3rd.pers. plural imperfect and aorist 2 εἴχοσαν [NT+3rd c.BC+], see at {Σχέθω}: perfect ἔσχηκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔχω

echo

scheo skheh'-o; (used in certain tenses only)

a primary verb; to hold (used in very various applications, literally

or figuratively, direct or remote; such as possession; ability,

contiuity, relation, or condition):--be (able, X hold, possessed

with), accompany, + begin to amend, can(+ -not), X conceive, count,

diseased, do + eat, + enjoy, + fear, following, have, hold, keep, +

lack, + go to law, lie, + must needs, + of necessity, + need, next, +

recover, + reign, + rest, + return, X sick, take for, + tremble, +

uncircumcised, use.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔχω

v.

I have, hold, possess

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔχω echō 708x

pluperfect., ἐσχήκειν, to hold, Rev. 1:16; to seize, possess a person, Mk. 16:8; to have, possess, Mt. 7:29, et al. freq.; to have, have ready, be furnished with, Mt. 5:23; Jn. 5:36; 6:68; to have as a matter of crimination, Mt. 5:23; Mk. 11:25; to have at command, Mt. 27:65; to have the power, be able, Mt. 18:25; Lk. 14:14; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-NSM — Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
29%having
having29% · 211×has9% · 62×have8% · 58×you have7% · 52×i have5% · 36×we have5% · 35×he has3% · 24×had3% · 21×other renderings30% · 217×

716 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 97 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb99%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 709 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, fἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
Article the
ἄγγελοςan angel, messenαὐτόςκαίand, even, also,
μήNeg
Article theδέbut, on the otheπρόβατονa sheep
ὅς
καίand, even, also,ἐνεἰμίI am, exist
χρείαneed, necessity, bus
οὐNegαὐτόςὅς
ἔχωhaving709×
what comes after →
Article the
ἑπτάIndecυἱόςa son, descendenδέbut, on the othe
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegὅς
ἐν
Article theἑαυτοῦΧριστόςanointed, the Me
οὖςthe ear
ἀκούωI hear, listen
ἐξουσίαpower, authority, we
Article theἀλλάbut, exceptἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, p

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔχω · 709× in the New Testament
Revelation John Luke Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Acts Hebrews 1 John Romans 2 Corinthians 1 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 11c. AD 40

ἀπεριμάχητον δὲ δόγμα καὶ ἀνωφελὲς ἀναρχίαν ὡς ἐν πόλει κατασκευάζον τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ τὸν ἔφορον ἢ βραβευτὴν ἢ δικαστὴν οὐκ ἔχοντι, ὑφ’ οὗ πάντ’ οἰκονομεῖσθαι καὶ πρυτανεύεσθαι θέμις.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Gen. 1 20Pathyris110 BC

ἔτους η Μεχεὶρ β, ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῆι κάτω

P.Bad. 2 3Pathyris110 BC

Μεχεὶρ β ἐν Παθύρει ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῇ κάτω

P.Adl. 4Ptolemais (Oberägypten)110 BC

Ψεμμῖνις … ου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου χαίρειν. ὁμολογῶ ἔχειν παρὰ σοῦ χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα τρῖα ἄτοκα ?. ταῦτα δέ ἐστιν ἃ προσωφείλετό σοι

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
βαλλάντιονballantion a purse G905 Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
4× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A purse is a pouch used to carry money, like the one Jesus told his disciples to take in Luke 22:35-36. It is also mentioned in Luke 10:4 and 12:33 as a place to store valuables.
Amplified meaning
money bag, wallet
Tyndale gloss
purse
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

βαλλάντιον is a noun meaning a purse or money-bag, derived from a term related to depositories. It appears in the New Testament in Luke 10:4, 12:33, and 22:35, 36. While the spelling variations βαλλάντιον and βαλάντιον exist, they refer to the same object.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

βαλλάντιον (Rec. βαλά-), -ου, ὁ,

[in LXX: Jb 14:17 (צְרוֹר), Pr 1:14 (כִּיס), To 1:14 8:2, Si 18:33 א2*;]

a purse: Lk 10:4 12:33 22:35, 36.†

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

βαλλάντιον (ballantion) — purse.

βαλλάντιον, τό,

bag, pouch, purse, [[Refs 5th c.BC+]; παῖς ἐκ βαλλαντίου a supposititious child, [Refs]

II. javelin (as if from βάλλω), a pun in [Refs 2nd c.AD+]. (The spelling βαλλ-is better attested than that with βαλ-,[Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare βαλλαντιοτομέω, -τόμος.)

Strong's Greek Dictionary

βαλλάντιον

balantion

probably remotely from 906 (as a depository); a pouch (for

money):--bag, purse.

see GREEK for 906

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

βαλάντιον, ου, τό

n.n.

a purse, money-bag

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

βαλλάντιον ballantion 4x

also spelled βαλάντιον, a bag, purse, Lk. 10:4; 12:33; 22:35, 36*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASN — Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

purs.

See BAG.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Purse

(1.) Gr. balantion, a bag (Luke 10:4; 22:35, 36).

(2.) Gr. zone, properly a girdle (Matt. 10:9; Mark 6:8), a money-belt. As to our Lord’s sending forth his disciples without money in their purses, the remark has been made that in this “there was no departure from the simple manners of the country. At this day the farmer sets out on excursions quite as extensive without a para in his purse; and a modern Moslem prophet of Tarshisha thus sends forth his apostles over this identical region. No traveller in the East would hestitate to throw himself on the hospitality of any village.” Thomson’s Land and the Book. (See SCRIP.)

Smith's Bible Dictionary

a bag for money. The Hebrews, when on a journey, were provided with a bag, in which they carried their money, (Genesis 42:35; Proverbs 1:14; 7:20; Isaiah 46:6) and, if they were merchants, also their weights. (25:13; Micah 6:11) This bag is described in the New Testament by the terms balantion (bag) (Luke 10:4; 12:33; 22:35,38) and glossokomon (originally the bag in which musicians carried the mouth-pieces of their Instruments). (John 12:6; 13:29) The girdle also served as a purse. (Matthew 10:9; Mark 6:8) Ladies…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
75%purse
purse75% · 3×purses25% · 1×

4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object75%adverbial25%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
βαστάζωI carry, carry away,
μήNeg
ἑαυτοῦ
ποιέωI do, make
ἄτερ
σύ
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
Article the
βαλλάντιονa purse
what comes after →
μήNeg
πήραa sack, walletπαλαιόωI make old, decl
καίand, even, also, nam
πήραa sack, wallet
αἴρωI raise, lift up
ὁμοίωςin like manner

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceβαλλάντιον · 4× in the New Testament
Luke
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 3rd c. AD
PSI 10 1128OxyrhynchosAD 201–AD 300

οἰκίας αὐτῆς μήτε ὑφαίρεσιν πεποιῆσθαι αὐτοὺς ζεύγους χεροψελίων χρυσοῦ δοκίμου μνᾶς ἀξίου μιᾶς καὶ βαλλαντίου στρατιωτικοῦ ἀσήμου οὐγκιῶν δύο καὶ κοραλλίου τιμήματος οὐκ ἔλαττον δραχμῶν ἑκατόν , μηδὲ συνειδέναι

P.Coll.Youtie 2 84OxyrhynchosAD 301–AD 400

λόγος τῶν ἐμβληθέντων ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ. κέρματος ἀπορρύματα ε κνίδια ὁμοίως β βαλλάντια … οἴνου κεράμια … βωριδίων κεράμια β ἀορτὴ ἱματίων α γάρους μαῦρα α ἐλαίου

O.Douch 5 553Kysis (Oasis Magna)AD 301–AD 425

μου ἀδελφῷ Σαβίνῳ Κολλοῦθος καὶ Παχοῦμις χαίρειν. σπούδασον δέξασθαι παρὰ Μακαρίου Ἀσφυνίτου τὸ μικρὸν βαλλάντιον καὶ ἀπόστειλον ἡμῖν αὐτό. πολλὰ ἀσπαζόμεθα τὴν ἀδελφὴν ἡμῶν Θέκλα. ἐρρῶσθαί σε εὐχόμεθα.

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
ἀράτω,airō he should take [it], G142 Verb · aorist · active · imperative · third person · singular
101× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Means to lift up or take away, used in John 8:59 to describe Jesus escaping, and in John 1:29 to describe Jesus taking away sin.
Tyndale gloss
to take up
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αἴρω, transliterated as airō, is a Greek verb meaning to lift, raise, or take up. It encompasses a range of actions such as bearing or carrying something away, and it can also refer to the figurative act of raising one's voice or expiating sin. The New Testament uses this word in contexts like lifting a bed (Mark 2:9) and bearing the cross (Matthew 16:24).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αἴρω,

[in LXX chiefly for נשׂא, also for לקח, etc.;]

to raise, take up, lift or draw up: Jo 8:59 11:41, Ac 27:17, al.

to bear, carry: Mt 4:6 16:24, al.

to bear or take away, carry off, remove: Mt 21:21, Jo 19:31, I Co 5:12 6:15 (v. Lft., Notes, 216), al.; of the taking away sin by Christ, Jo 1:29, I Jo 3:5. (Cf. ἀπ’, ἐξ-, ἐπ-, μετ-, συν-, ὑπερ-αίρω). For exx. from π., v. MM, VGT, s.v.)

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αἴρω (contr. fr. poet. deipw); fut. ἀρῶ; 1 aor. ἦρα, inf. ἄραι, impv. dpov; pf. ἦρκα (Col. ii. 14); Pass., (pres. αἴρομαι]; pf. ἦρμαι (Jn. xx. 1); 1 aor. ἤρθην; (on the rejection of iota subser. in these tenses see Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. pp. 413, 439 ;[W. 47 (46)]); 1 fut. dpOjcopa; [fr. Hom. down]; in the Sept. generally i. q. NWI; to lift up, raise. 1. to raise up; a. to raise stones, Jn. viii. 59; serpents, Mk. xvi. 18; a dead body, Acts xx. 9. b. to raise upwards, elevate, lift up: the hand, Rey. x. 5; the eyes, Jn. xi. 41; the voice, i. e. speak in a loud tone, ery out, Lk. xvii. 13; Acts iv. 24, (also in prof. writ.) ; τὴν ψυχήν, to raise the mind, i. q. excite, affect strongly (with a sense of fear, hope, joy, grief, ete.) ; in Jn. x. 24 to hold the mind in suspense between doubt and hope, cf. Liicke [or Meyer] ad loc. ¢. to draw up: a fish, Mt. xvii. 27 (ἀνασπᾶν, Hab. i. 15)…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αἴρω. For αἴρω, “raise,” (ii/A.D.) ἄραι τὴν χεῖρα, and so 70. 607% 57. for αἴρειν χεῖρας may be specially noted, the Alexandrian inser. in Predsigke 1323 (ii/A.D.): θεῷ ὑψίστῳ καὶ πάντων ἐπόπτῃ Kal Ἡλίῳ καὶ Νεμέσεσι αἴρει ᾿Αρσεινόη ἄωρος τὰς χεῖρας. The inscr. is heathen, but has striking similarity to the Jewish prayer for vengeance on which Deissmann comments in ZAZ p. 423 ff. : is its thought partly due to Jewish suggestion? In P Fay 103% (iti/A.D.) payment is allotted to the bearers of a corpse—tois ἠρκάσι “lift up,”? as in Rev τοῦ, cf. Syd/ 807% One passage (4-601) αὐτόν : cf. P Grenf 11. 77° (iii/iv A.D.) ( = Se/ec- | tions, p. 120). In a magical formula of iii/A.D. instructions are given to take twenty-nine palm leaves, on whicn the names of the gods have been inscribed, and then —épe (= alpe) κατὰ δύο δύο, ‘‘Jift them up two by two,” P Oxy VI. 8861 ( = Selections, p. 111). A…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αἴρω (airō) — to take up.

ἀείρω,

Epic dialect, Ionic dialect, and poetry; αἴρω (once in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Attic dialect and Trag. (except [Refs 4th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἀέρρω, [Refs 7th c.BC+]imperfect ἤειρον (συν-) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect ἄειρον[Refs 8th c.BC+], Attic dialect and Trag. ᾖρον: future ἀρῶ [ᾱ], contraction for ἀερῶ (which is not found), [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἤειρα (συν-) [Refs 8th c.BC+], (παρ-) [Refs 7th c.BC+], Epic dialect ἄειρα[Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect imperative ἀέρρατε[Refs 7th c.BC+]; subjunctive ἀέρσῃ[Refs]; participle ἀείρας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἦρα[Refs 5th c.BC+], 3rd.pers.plural ἤροσαν[LXX+3rd c.BC+], infinitive ἆραι[Refs 3rd c.BC+], participle ἄρας[Refs 5th c.BC+] in all moods]: perfect ἦρκα[Refs 4th c.BC+], (ἀπ-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]pluperfect ἤρκεσαν (ἀπ-) [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—middle ἀείρομαι (ἀπ-) [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αἴρομαι [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αἴρω

airo

a primary root; to lift up; by implication, to take up or away;

figuratively, to raise (the voice), keep in suspense (the mind),

specially, to sail away (i.e. weigh anchor); by Hebraism (compare

5375) to expiate sin:--away with, bear (up), carry, lift up, loose,

make to doubt, put away, remove, take (away, up).

see HEBREW for 05375

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αἴρω

v.

I raise, lift up

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αἴρω airō 101x

to take up, lift, raise; bear, carry; take away, remove; destroy, kill

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αἴρω epic and poet. ἀείρω q.v. distinguish ἀρῶ from ἀ_ρῶ, contr. of ἀερῶ. Act.

to take up, raise, lift up, Il., etc.; αἴρειν βῆμα to step, walk, Eur.; αἴρ. σημεῖον to hoist a signal, Xen.:—Pass. to mount up, ascend, id. Xen.

often of armies and ships, αἴρ. τὰς ναῦς to get the fleet under sail, Thuc.:—also intr. to get under way, start, set out, ἆραι τῶι στρατῶι id. Thuc.;—so in Mid. and Pass., Hdt., etc.

to bear, sustain, μόρον Aesch.; ἆθλον Soph.

to raise up, exalt, Aesch.:—of passion, to exalt, excite, ὑψοῦ αἴρειν θυμόν to grow excited, Soph.; αἴρειν θάρσος to pluck up courage, Eur., etc.: Pass., οὐκ ἤρθη νοῦν ἐς ἀτασθαλίην Simon.

to raise by words, to extol, exaggerate, Eur., Dem.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAM-3S — Verb · aorist · active · imperative · third person · singular
aorist active imperative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAM-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iMperative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
9%do take
do take9% · 9×do take up6% · 6×they took up6% · 6×having taken up5% · 5×will be taken away4% · 4×take4% · 4×away3% · 3×he should take up3% · 3×other renderings61% · 63×

103 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 55 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb99%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 101 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἑαυτοῦχορτάζωI feed, satisfyἐγείρωI wake, arouse,
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,μαθητήςa learner, disciἐνώπιονbefore the face
λέγωI say, speak
οὗτοςπαρίστημιI bring, presentπαμπληθείall at once, all
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
ὅςδοκέωI think, seem, a
ἵναin order that, so th
ἀγγαρεύωI impress, sendῬοῦφοςRufusἐρωτάωI ask, question,
αἴρωhe should take [it],101×
what comes after →
Article the
κράβαττοςa bed, mattress,σταυρόςa crossπτῶμαa carcass, corps
ἀπό
αὐτόςσύArticle the
καίand, even, also, nam
βάλλωI cast, throw, rἀνοίγωI openλέγωI say, speak
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,ἀπόἐκ
σύ
μήNegArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαἴρω · 101× in the New Testament
John Luke Mark Matthew Acts 1 Corinthians Revelation 1 John Colossians Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 132 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 10c. AD 40

τοῦ μὲν γὰρ γεγονότος ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τὸν πατέρα καὶ ποιητὴν αἱρεῖ λόγος·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.12c. AD 75–95

οἱ δὲ συνέντες ἰσχὺν αὐτῷ καὶ μέγεθος πραγμάτων τὴν ὄψιν προλέγουσαν καὶ κατʼ αὐτῶν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ἐσομένην τῷ μὲν Ἰωσήπῳ τούτων οὐδὲν ὡς οὐ γνώριμον αὐτοῖς τὸ ὄναρ ὂν διεσάφησαν, ἀρὰς δʼ ἐποιήσαντο μηδὲν εἰς τέλος αὐτῷ παρελθεῖν ὧν ὑπενόουν καὶ πρὸς…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 7.11c. AD 100

τύπος ἐστὶν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ θέμενος, ὅτι ὃς ἐὰν θέλῃ τὸ ἔριον ἆραι τὸ κόκκινον, δεῖ αὐτὸν πολλὰ παθεῖν διὰ τὸ εἶναι φοβερὰν τὴν ἄκανθαν, καὶ θλιβέντα κυριεῦσαι αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD 2nd c. BC

Ἐπιθυμήτῳ μηδὲ Τρυφωνίωνι ἂν μή σε ασ … α … …… ται τὸ καθέν” αἱρῶν ὅτι ὁ ἐπίτροπος ἔγνωκε ὅτι ἔχει τ … … … … … ἐνέχυρον, ἄν

P.Graux 2 9Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 33

σὺν Σεξτιλλίωι ἑκατοντάρχηι δραχμαὶ ξ παιδαρίωι δραχμαὶ η γείνεται τοῦ ιη ἔτους ἀργυρίου δραχμαὶ Αρη καὶ τοῦ ιθ ἔτους ἀργυρίου δραχμαὶ ω καὶ τιμῆς κλημάτων εἰς μοσχείαν δραχμαὶ ρκ

P.Mich. 5 237Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 43

ἀρουρῶν δ γ μίσθωσις Κρονίωνος πρὸς Ἀκῆν καὶ ἄλλον ἀρουρῶν … μίσθωσις Κρονίωνος πρὸς Ἡρᾶν ἀρουρῶν μίσθωσις Μαχάτου καὶ ἄλλου πρὸς Με … είφιον μυμ … μίσθωσις Ἀμάειτος πρὸς

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
ὁμοίωςhomoiōs likewise G3668 Adverb
31× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means similarly or in a like manner. It is used in Matthew 22:26 and Luke 10:37 to describe doing something in a similar way. It can also be used to describe a similarity in action or behavior.
Amplified meaning
in the same manner
Tyndale gloss
similarly
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὁμοίως (i.e., *homoiōs*) is an adverb meaning 'likewise' or 'in like manner.' It is derived from the root ὅμοιος and is used in various contexts, including several New Testament passages like Matthew 22:26 and Mark 4:16. The entries indicate that it can also imply equality or similarity in different situations.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁμοίως

(< ὅμοιος),

adv.,

likewise, in like manner, equally: Mt 22:26, Mk 4:16, Lk 10:37, al.; c. dat., Mt 22:39, Lk 6:31; ὁ. καί, Mt 22:26, Mk 15:31, al.; ὁ. καθώς, Lk 17:28; καθὼς . . . ὁ., Lk 6:31; ὁ. μέντοι καί, Ju 8.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁμοίως, (ὅμοιος), advy., [fr. Pind., Hdt. down], likewise, equally, in the same way: Mk.iv. 16 (Trmrg. br. op.) ; Lk. 111. 11; x. 37; xiii 3 LT ΤΥ ΜΗ; 5RGLTrorg.; xvi. 25; xvii. 31: Jn.v.19; xxi.13; 1 Pet. iii. 1, 7; v.5; Heb. ix. 21; Rey. ii. 15 (for Rec. ὃ μισῶν); viii. 123 ὁμοίως καί, Mt. xxii. 26; xxvi. 35; Mk. xv. 31 [here Ree. ὁμ. δὲ καί ]; Lk. v. 33; xvii. 23RGL; xxii. 36; Jn. vi. 11; 1 Co. vii. 22 R G3 ὁμοίως μέντοι καί, Jude 8; ὁμοίως δὲ καί, Mt. xxvii. 41 RG (where T om. L br. δὲ καί, Tr br. δέ, WH om. δέ and br. καί); Lk. v.10; x. 32; 1 Co. vii. 3 (where Lbr. δέ), 4; Jas. ii. 25; and correctly restored by L Tr mrg. in Ro. i. 27, for R T Tr txt. WH ὁμοίως τε xai; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. i. p. 77; [W. 571 (531); B. § 149, 8]; ὁμοίως preceded by καθώς, Lk. vi. 81.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὁμοίως. An interesting parallel to Jn 519 where ὁμοίως should not be translated ‘‘in like manner” (RV) but ‘‘likewise’’ (AV : cf. 613, 2138) is afforded by P Par 478 (c. B.c. 153) (= Sedections, Ὁ. 22) where the writer bitterly exclaims—épvto τὸν Zapamw . . . ὅτι ψευδῆι πάντα καὶ of παρὰ σὲ θεοὶ ὁμοίως, “1 swear by Serapis that all things are false and your gods likewise.” Cf. 26. 608 (c. B.c. 154) ὁμοίως Kal Kérrafos, ὁμοίως kal Χεντοσνεύς, BGU IV. 116774 (B.c. 12) ἐφ᾽ ὧι ὁμοίως μὴ (ἐπελεύσε)σθαι τὴν ᾿Ισιδώ(ραν) κατὰ μη(δένα) τρόπί(ον), and Ῥ Ryl II. 243% (ii/a.p.) δέξαι παρὰ Νιννάρου is λόγον Εἰρήνης τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῇ μέρος καὶ is τὸν] λόγον Δημαρίου ὁμοίως δέξαι πα[ρ]ὰ [᾿Ατ]ρῆτος τὸ ἔπιβάλλον αὐτῇ μέρος, ‘receive from Ninnarus for Irene’s account the share belonging to her, and likewise from Hatres for Demarion’s account the share belonging to her.” The adv. is common= ‘‘ditto,” eg.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁμοίως (homoiōs) — similarly.

Included with: ὅμοιος

or (as in [Refs 8th c.BC+] ὁμοῖος, α, ον (compare ἐρῆμος, ἑτοῖμος): later Epic dialect also ὁμοίιος (B, which see); Aeolic dialect ὔμοιος [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (adverb -ως[Refs 4th c.AD+] ὑμοῖος [Refs 4th c.BC+]: (ὁμός):—like, resembling, ὡς αἰεὶ τὸν ὁ. ἄγει θεὸς ὡς τὸν ὁ. 'birds of a feather flock together', [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὡς ἐπὶ τῶν ὁ. as in similar cases (of persons), [Refs 2nd c.AD+], etc.: comparative -ότερος more like, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: superlative -ότατος most like, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. the same, ἄμφω γὰρ πέπρωται ὁμοίην γαῖαν ἐρεῦσαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; hence (i.e. ἑαυτῷ), always the same, unchanging, αἰεὶ πόδας καὶ χεῖρας ὁμοῖοι [Refs 8th c.BC+]the same as ever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἓν καὶ ὅ. one…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁμοίως

homoios

adverb from 3664; similarly:--likewise, so.

see GREEK for 3664

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁμοίως

Adv

in like manner

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁμοίως homoiōs 30x

likewise, in a similar manner, Mt. 22:26; 27:41

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%likewise
likewise100% · 31×

31 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial90%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 31 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ποιέωI do, make
δέησιςsupplication, prσύ
ἀνήρa male human being,
Article the
ἀπαρνέομαιI deny, disown, disr
σύ
βρῶμαfood of any kind
ἔχωI have, hold, po
ὁμοίωςlikewise31×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, πήραa sack, wallet
δέbut, on the other ha
καίand, even, also,
Article the
ἀρχιερεύςhigh priest, chiἐπίκακόςbad, evil
ποιέωI do, make
ἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose, am

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁμοίως · 31× in the New Testament
Luke 1 Corinthians 1 Peter John Matthew Mark Revelation Hebrews James Jude Romans
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas Polycarp
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 118c. AD 40

ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ τοῦ σώματος εἴ τις ἐξετάζειν ἐπιχειρήσειε τά τ’ ἐκτὸς καὶ ἐντὸς μέρη, καθ’ ἑκάτερον ἑπτὰ εὑρήσει·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.12c. AD 75–95

κἀμαυτῷ δὴ πρέπειν ἐνόμισα τὸ μὲν τοῦ ἀρχιερέως μιμήσασθαι μεγαλόψυχον, τῷ βασιλεῖ δὲ πολλοὺς ὁμοίως ὑπολαβεῖν καὶ νῦν εἶναι φιλομαθεῖς·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.9c. AD 100

αἰσθάνεσθαι οὖν ὀφείλομεν, μὴ ὄντες ἀσύνετοι, τὴν γνώμην τῆς ἀγαθωσύνης τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, ὅτ̓ ἡμῖν λέγει, θέλων ἡμᾶς μὴ ὁμοίως πλανωμένους ἐκείνοις ζητεῖν, πῶς προσάγωμεν αὐτῷ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

Σενπελαίαι, μέρους ἡμίσους τῶν πατρικῶν ἐγγαίων ὄντων δ ἔν τε τῶι Περιθήβας καὶ Παθυρίτηι, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων, ἐν οἷς καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ Κόχλακος τῆς Ἀραβίας τοῦ

P.Lips. 1 7Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)108 BC

τοῦ ἐν τῆι Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἀρχείου τοῦ λγ ἔτους Χοίακ α ἐπὶ Πτολεμαίου ἀγορανόμου, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐπιβάλλοντος μέρους Σεννήσει τῆι τοῦ Πατοῦτος θυγατρὶ τοῦ δηλουμένου δανείου

P.Adl. 20Poinkoris (Diopolites)99 BC

ἀδελφῶν ?, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς σφραγῖδος, λιβὸς γῆ Ὥρου τοῦ Νεχούθου τοῦ ὠνουμένου· ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτοῖς ψιλῶν τόπων ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ λιβὸς μέρει κώμης

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
καὶkai also G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ol'-so: In the Greek kai, when it is equivalent to "also" or "even," is always placed before the word or phrase which it is intended to emphasize (e.g. Ac 12:3; 1 Joh 4:21). Mt 6:14 should therefore read, "Your heavenly Father will forgive you also"; Lu 6:13, "Whom also he named apostles"; Heb 8:6, "The mediator of a better covenant also"; and 1Th 4:14, `If we believe that Jesus died and rose again, so also (we believe that) those who are fallen asleep in Jesus, God will bring with Him.'

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίalso8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
πήραν·pēra a bag; G4082 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
6× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A leather pouch or bag to carry food, like a wallet, as Jesus instructed his disciples in Matthew 10:10 and Mark 6:8.
Amplified meaning
sack, provisions
Tyndale gloss
bag
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πήρα (pēra) refers to a leather pouch or wallet used for carrying provisions. It appears in the New Testament in contexts related to travel and provision, such as in Matthew and Mark. Some sources suggest it may also refer to a collecting bag for alms, though this interpretation is debated.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

** πήρα, -ας, ἡ,

[in LXX: Jth 10:5 13:10, 15*;]

a leathern pouch for victuals, etc., a wallet (Deiss. thinks an alms-bag, v. LAE, 108 ff.): Mt 10:10, Mk 6:8, Lk 9:3 10:4 22:35, 36.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πήρα, -as, 7, α wallet (a leathern sack, in which travellers and shepherds carried their provisions) [A. V. scrip (q- v- in B.D.)]: Mt. x. 10; Mk. vi. 8; Lk. ix.3; x. 4; xxii. 35 sq. (Hom., Arstph., Joseph., Plut., Hdian., Leian., al.; with τῶν βρωμάτων added, Judith xiii. 10.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πήρα. In Mt το"ῦ a/. πήρα is usually understood as “ἃ travellingbag’ containing clothes or provisions for the journey ; but Deissmann (LAZ, p. 108 ff.) prefers to see in it ‘*a collectingbag ’’ such as beggar-priests of pagan cults carried for receiving alms, and in support of this view cites an inscr. in which a slave of the Syrian goddess tells how he went begging for the ‘“lady’’, adding—a(m)opdpynce ἑκάστη ἀγωγὴ πήρας ὁ, ‘teach journey brought in seventy bags” (BCH xxi. (1897) p. 60-—Imperial period). Consequently, as Deissmann’s translator points out (LAE Zc. n.§), “*wallet ’’ is the right word in English, as seen e.g. in Shakespeare 7Z7oz/us and Cressida III. iii. 145, ‘‘ Time hath, my lord, a wallet at his back, Wherein he puts alms for oblivion.” For the dim. πηρίδιον see Epict. iii. 22. 10, and Menandrea p. 141! πηρίδιον γνωρισμάτων, ‘Sa walletful of birth tokens.” The…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πήρα (pēra) — bag.

πήρα,

Ionic dialect πήρη (πάρη [ᾰ] [Refs 4th c.AD+], ἡ, leathern pouch for victuals, etc., wallet, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πήρα

pera

of uncertain affinity; a wallet or leather pouch for food:--scrip.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πήρα, ας, ἡ

n.f.

a sack, wallet

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πήρα pēra 6x

a leather bag or sack for provisions, wallet, Mt. 10:10; Mk. 6:8

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πήρα πήρα, ionic πήρη, ἡ, a leathern pouch, a wallet, scrip, Lat. pera, Od., Ar.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

Bags of various kinds are mentioned in the English Bible, but often in a way to obscure rather than tr the original.

(1) "Bag" is used for a Hebrew word which means a shepherd's "bag," rendered "wallet" in the Revised Version (British and American). This "bag" of the shepherd or "haversack" of the traveler was of a size sufficient for one or more days' provisions. It was made of the skin of animals, ordinarily undressed, as most of the other "bags" of ancient times were, and was carried slung across the shoulder. This is the "scrip for the journey" pera mentioned in Mt 10:10 and its parallel (the King James Version). ("Scrip" is Old English, now obsolete.) A unique word appears in 1Sa 17:40,49 which had to be explained even to Hebrew readers by the gloss, "the shepherd's bag,"…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Bag

(1.) A pocket of a cone-like shape in which Naaman bound two pieces of silver for Gehazi (2 Kings 5:23). The same Hebrew word occurs elsewhere only in Isa. 3:22, where it is rendered “crisping-pins,” but denotes the reticules (or as R.V., “satchels”) carried by Hebrew women.

(2.) Another word (kees) so rendered means a bag for carrying weights (Deut. 25:13; Prov. 16:11; Micah 6:11). It also denotes a purse (Prov. 1:14) and a cup (23:31).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

is the rendering of several words in the Old and New Testaments. Charitim , the "bags" in which Naaman bound up the two talents of silver for Gehazi. (2 Kings 5:23) They were long cone-like bags of the size to hold a precise amount of money, and tied or sealed for that amount, as we stamp the value on a coin. Cis , a bag for carrying weights, (25:13) also used as a purse (Proverbs 1:14) Celi , in (Genesis 42:25) is the "sack" in which Jacob’s sons carried the corn which they brought from Egypt. The shepherd’s "bag" used by David was for the purpose of carrying the lambs unable to walk. (Zechariah 11:15; 16:5) Tschar , properly a "bundle," (

De 25:13 Lu 12:33. Eastern money was often sealed up in bags containing a certain sum, for which they passed current while the seal remained unbroken, 2Ki 12:10.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
83%bag
bag83% · 5×provision-bag17% · 1×

6 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object83%adverbial17%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 6 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
μήNeg
ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, fβαλλάντιονa purse, money-b
καίand, even, also, nam
βαλλάντιονa purse, money-bὁμοίωςin like manner
μήτεNeg
ῥάβδοςa rod, staff
πήραa bag;
what comes after →
μήNeg
εἰςὑπόδημαa sandal
καίand, even, also, nam
ὑπόδημαa sandalArticle the
εἰς
ὁδόςa way, road, jou
μήτεNeg
ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, f

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπήρα · 6× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Mark
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
The Shepherd of Hermas Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.109c. AD 40

τὴν οὖν πηρὰν αἴσθησιν τῆς τῶν πραγμάτων ἀντιλήψεως ἐξηπάτηκεν, εἴ γε δυναμένην ἐπὶ νοῦν τρέπεσθαι καὶ ἡνιοχεῖσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ κεκώλυκεν, ἐπὶ τὸ ἐκτὸς αἰσθητὸν ἀγαγοῦσα καὶ λίχνον αὐτὴν ἀπεργασαμένη τοῦ ἑαυτῆς ποιητικοῦ, ἵνα ἡ μὲν αἴσθησις πηρὸς οὖσα…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 6.185c. AD 75–95

τίθησιν οὖν τὰ ὅπλα καὶ τὴν βακτηρίαν ἀράμενος καὶ πέντε λίθους ἐκ τοῦ χειμάρρου βαλὼν εἰς τὴν πήραν τὴν ποιμενικὴν καὶ σφενδόνην ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ χειρὶ φέρων ἐπὶ τὸν Γολίαθον ἐπορεύετο.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 5.1.1c. AD 140

Προσευξαμένου μου ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ καὶ καθίσαντος εἰς τὴν κλίνην εἰσῆλθεν ἀνήρ τις ἔνδοξος τῇ ὄψει, σχήματι ποιμενικῷ, περικείμενος δέρμα αἴγειον λευκὸν καὶ πήραν ἔχων ἐπὶ τῶν ὤμων καὶ ῥάβδον εἰς τὴν χεῖρα.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
1st c. AD 5th c. AD 6th c. AD
O.Petr. 264Berenike bzw. KoptosAD 42

Κρόνιος Ἑρμίου Νικάνορι Πανήους χαίρειν. ἔχω παρὰ σοῦ ἐν Βερενίκῃ ἅς σοι ἐπέθηκε Παρῆς, πήρας ὀκτὼ γίνονται πῆραι η. ἔτους γ Τιβερίου Κλαυδίου Καίσαρος Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Αὐτοκράτορος μηνὸς Σεβαστοῦ

P.Wash.Univ. 1 41AD 401–AD 600

το … … θαυμασιότης. ἔστιν γὰρ ὁ οἶνος … … … ος ἐν τῇ πήρᾳ ἐστὶν τῶν χαρτίων … … κόψον μίαν συρίαν τῆς πήρας καὶ τοῦτο ευ

Gr.Med.Pap. 2 10AD 551–AD 625

τὸ ὀθόνιόν μου καὶ τὸ κυάθιόν μου καὶ τὸ τροχόεν σφραγίδιόν μου καὶ τὴν πήραν τοῦ ἰατροῦ καὶ τὴν σμίλην μου καὶ τὸ κοχλιάριον ξυλικόν

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
ho the [one] G3588 Article · nominative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

wun.

See NUMBER.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the [one]19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
μὴ not G3361 Particle · negative
1,060× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Not is a word used to show that something is not true or is not happening, like in phrases that say 'lest' or 'God forbid', as seen in various parts of the New Testament.
Tyndale gloss
not
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μή () is a Greek negative particle used to express subjective negation, often in conditional or hypothetical contexts. It contrasts with οὐ (ou), which indicates absolute denial. μή can function as an adverb meaning 'not' or as a conjunction meaning 'lest.' It appears in various grammatical constructions, including prohibitions and deliberative questions, and is referenced in verses like Matthew 5:29 and John 3:18.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μή,

subjective negative particle,

used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic., μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין, אַיִן, אַל.]

As a neg. adv., not;

with ref. to thought or opinion: Jo 3:18, Tit 1:11, II Pe 1:9.

In delib. questions, c. subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mk 12:14, Ro 3:8.

In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mt 10:14,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μή, Sept. for Ox, |X, PN, ἃ particle of negation, which differs from οὐ (which is always an adverb) in that ov denies the thing itself (orto speak technically, denies simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively). but μή denies the thought of the thing, or the thing according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, preference, of some one (hence, as we say technically, indirectly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction holds also of the compounds οὐδείς, μηδείς, οὐκέτι, μηκέτι, ete. But pris either an ad verb of negation, not (Lat. non, ne); or aconjunction, that... not, lest, (Lat. ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. num) [i. e. (generally) implying aneg. ans.; in indir. quest. whether nol (suggesting apprehension) ]. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. § 267 p- 802 sqq-; Matthiae § 608; Bitm. Gram. § 148 (cf. Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqq.); Kiihner ii. §§ 512 sq. p.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μή Grenf II. 384 (mid. 1.8.6.) καλῶς οὖ]ν ποιήσις μὴ ἀμελήσ[α]ς α[. . ἀγο]ράσαι. .. , P Oxy I. 3815 (a.p. 49--50) (= Selections, p. 53) τοῦ δὲ Σύρου μὴ βουλομένου ἐνμεῖναι τοῖς κεκριμένοις, “45 Syrus does not wish to abide by what has been decided,” 2d. II. 2755 (A.D. 66) (= Selections, p. 58) ἔγραψα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ μὴ ἰδότος γράμματα, “1 wrote for him seeing that he was unlettered,” BGU I. 22° (a.p. 114) (= Selections, p. 74) TappovOios . . . τὸ παρὸν μὴ ἔχουσα κύριον, ‘ Tarmuthis at present without a guardian,’ and P Grenf II. 779 (iii/iv A.D.) (= Sedections, p. 120) θαυμάζω πάνυ [ὅτι] ἀλόγως ἀπέστητε μὴ ἄραντες [τὸ σ]ῶμα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ὑμῶν, “1 wonder exceedingly that you went off so unreasonably, without taking the body of your brother”; cf. P Tor 1. 1¥8-4 (νον 116) εἰ δὲ kal τις θείηι τὸ μὴ ὄν (cf. 1 Cor 1°8)—acc. and inf. follow, P Ryl II. 144°? (Α.Ὁ. 38) ἐπαγαγεῖν αἰτίας τοῦ μὴ ὄντος, ‘‘…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μή (mē) — not.

μή,

Elean μά [ᾱ] [Refs 6th c.BC+]. (Cf. Sanskrit mā´, Armenian mi [from I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] mē´], negative used in prohibitions):—not, the negative of the will and thought, as οὐ of fact and statement; μή rejects, οὐ denies; μή is relative, οὐ absolute; μή subjective, οὐ objective. (A few examples of μηδέ and μηδείς have been included.)

__A in INDEPENDENT sentences, used in expressions of will or wish, command, entreaty, warning,

__A.1 with present imperative, 2 person, μή μ᾽ ἐρέθιζε [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely with aorist imperative, μὴ.. ἔνθεο τιμῇ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Attic dialect, μὴ ψεῦσον, ὦ Ζεῦ, τῆς.. ἐλπίδος [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect imperative [Refs 8th c.BC+] person when perfect = present, μὴ κεκράγετε [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

μή

me

a primary particle of qualified negation (whereas 3756 expresses an

absolute denial); (adverb) not, (conjunction) lest; also (as an

interrogative implying a negative answer (whereas 3756 expects an

affirmative one)) whether:--any but (that), X forbear, + God forbid, +

lack, lest, neither, never, no (X wise in), none, nor, (can-)not,

nothing, that not, un(-taken), without. Often used in compounds in

substantially the same relations. See also 3362, 3363, 3364, 3372,

3373, 3375, 3378.

see GREEK for 3756

see GREEK for 3362

see GREEK for 3363

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

see GREEK for 3373

see GREEK for 3375

see GREEK for 3378

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μή

Neg.prt.

not, lest

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μή mē 1x

a negative particle, can function as a conj, not, for the particulars of its usage, especially as distinguished from that of οὐ, consult a grammar; as a conj., lest, that not, Mt. 5:29, 30; 18:10; 24:6; Mk. 13:36; μή, or μήτι, or μήποτε, when prefixed to an interrogative clause, it expresses an intimation either of the reality of the matters respecting which the question is asked, Mt. 12:23; or the contrary, Jn. 4:12

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Particle-N — Particle · negative
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
71%not
not71% · 772×except9% · 95×unless5% · 58×surely not4% · 41×lest3% · 32×otherwise2% · 23×other renderings4% · 48×other renderings1% · 16×

1,085 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial84%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,060 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,σύἐγώ
ἵναin order that, so th
αὐτόςσύπροσεύχομαιI pray, pray for
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώαὐτόςεἰμίI am, exist
εἰCond
αὐτόςυἱόςa son, descendenκαίand, even, also,
Article the
καίand, even, also,εἰςδιά
μήnot1060×
what comes after →
Article the
πατήρfather, Father, υἱόςa son, descendenσημεῖονa sign, miracle,
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
καίand, even, also,ποιμήνa shepherdβάθοςdepth, a depth,
εἰμίI am, exist
δίδωμιI offer, giveἐνμετά
τὶς
σύὑστερέωI am lacking, faγεννάωI beget, bring f
φοβέωI fear, am terrified
ἀπόArticle theμόνοςalone, but, only

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμή · 1,060× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Timothy Galatians

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 1,321 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
ἔχωνechō having G2192 Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
709× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means to have or hold something, like a possession or ability. It is used in many ways, such as having power or being with someone. The Bible uses it in Revelation 5:8 and 14:6.
Amplified meaning
lacking, not having
Tyndale gloss
to have/be
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔχω, transliterated as echō, means 'to have' or 'to hold' and is used in various contexts, including possession, ability, and condition. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often relating to physical possession or metaphorical concepts like keeping faith or emotions. Notably, it can also refer to being pregnant, as seen in Matthew 1:18. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔχω,

[in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), בַּעַל, יֵשׁ, etc., 59 words in all;]

(on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, v. M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183),

to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions.

Trans.;

to have, hold, hold fast, etc.;

to hold, as, in the hand: Re 5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Re 1:16 10:2, al.;

of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mt 3:4 22:12, al.; so freq. pres. ptcp. (LS, s.v., A, I, 6; Bl., § 74, 2), Mk 11:13, Jo 18:10, Re 9:17, al.;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔχω ; fut. ἕξω ; impf. εἶχον, [1 pers. plur. εἴχαμεν, 2 Jn. ἔχω 266 5 T Tr WH], 8 pers. plur. εἶχαν (Mk. viii. 7 L T Tr WH; Rey. ix. 8 LT Tr WH; but ef. [ Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 38; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 165]; B. 40 (35)) and εἴχοσαν (LT Tr WH in Jn. xv. 22, 24; but ef. Bitm. in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. 1858, pp. 485 sqq. 491; see his N. T. Gr. p. 43 (37); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 39; Τὰ Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 165; ef. δολεόω ]) ; pres. mid. ptep. ἐχόμενος ; to have,—with 2 aor. act. ἔσχον; pf. ἔσχηκα; I. Transitively. have (hold) in the hand: τὶ ἐν τῇ χειρί, Rev. i. 16; vi. 5; x. 2; xvii. 4; and simply, Rev. v. 8; viii. 3, 6; xiv. 6, ete.; Heb. viii. 3. Ὁ. in the sense of wearing (Lat. gestare) ; of garments, arms and the like: τὸ ἔνδυμα, Mt. iii. 4; xxii. 12; κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων, sc. τί, having a covering hanging down from the head, i.e. having the head covered [B. $130, 5; W. §…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔχω. It may be well to illustrate some of the less usual forms of this common verb. The future σχήσω (cf. Kithner-Blass Gr. 1. ii. p. 112 n.8) is restored by the editor in OGZS 751° (ii/ B.C.) ἐπεὶ θλιβέντες ἐμ πλείοσιν ἀσθενῶς [σχή]σετε. For the 2 aor. with 1 aor. termination (cf. Ac 757 D συνἐσχαν) see BGU 11. 4518 (i/ii A.D.) ἀναγκαίως ἔσχαμεν δ[ι7᾽ ἐπιστολῆς σε ἀσπάσεσθαι, and for ἔσχοσαν cf. OG/S 315°" (B.C. 164-159) ὑφοψίαν μοχθηράν, ἣν Kal περὶ Tod ἀδελφοῦ ἔσχοσαν. In 20. 2237 (iii/B.c.) we have αὐτοὶ ἀπολογισάμενοι περί τε τῆς εὐνοίας ἣν διὰ παντὸς εἰσχήκατε εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν οἰκίαν, and for similar forms see the editor's note ® to 2b. 323. For the trans. use of the verb see such passages as P Oxy IV. 743!® (B.c. 2) εἰ καὶ m[p]ds ἄλλους εἶχον πρᾶγμα, βοηθὸν αὐτοῦ γ[εἸνέσθαι διὰ ἣν ἔχομε(ν) πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς φιλίαν, BGU I. 228(a.p. 114) (= «ϑελδείζογις, p. 74), which illustrate 1 Cor…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔχω (echō) — to have/be.

ἔχω,

__A2nd pers. singular ἔχεισθα conjecture in [Refs 7th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular subjunctive ἔχῃσθα [Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect εἶχον, Epic dialect ἔχον [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect and poetry ἔχεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]future ἕξω, Epic dialect infinitive ἑξέμεναι [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (of momentary action, especially in sense check, see below [Refs 4th c.BC+], not found in Attic dialect Inscrr. or [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular σχήσησθα [Refs]aorist 1 ἔσχης α falsa lectio in [Refs 3rd c.AD+]aorist 2 ἔσχον, imperative σχές [Refs 5th c.BC+] only in Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; subjunctive σχῶ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural σχοίησαν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive σχεῖν [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect σχέμεν [Refs] (in Alexandr. Gr. 3rd.pers. plural imperfect and aorist 2 εἴχοσαν [NT+3rd c.BC+], see at {Σχέθω}: perfect ἔσχηκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔχω

echo

scheo skheh'-o; (used in certain tenses only)

a primary verb; to hold (used in very various applications, literally

or figuratively, direct or remote; such as possession; ability,

contiuity, relation, or condition):--be (able, X hold, possessed

with), accompany, + begin to amend, can(+ -not), X conceive, count,

diseased, do + eat, + enjoy, + fear, following, have, hold, keep, +

lack, + go to law, lie, + must needs, + of necessity, + need, next, +

recover, + reign, + rest, + return, X sick, take for, + tremble, +

uncircumcised, use.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔχω

v.

I have, hold, possess

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔχω echō 708x

pluperfect., ἐσχήκειν, to hold, Rev. 1:16; to seize, possess a person, Mk. 16:8; to have, possess, Mt. 7:29, et al. freq.; to have, have ready, be furnished with, Mt. 5:23; Jn. 5:36; 6:68; to have as a matter of crimination, Mt. 5:23; Mk. 11:25; to have at command, Mt. 27:65; to have the power, be able, Mt. 18:25; Lk. 14:14; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-NSM — Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
29%having
having29% · 211×has9% · 62×have8% · 58×you have7% · 52×i have5% · 36×we have5% · 35×he has3% · 24×had3% · 21×other renderings30% · 217×

716 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 97 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb99%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 709 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, fἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
Article the
ἄγγελοςan angel, messenαὐτόςκαίand, even, also,
μήNeg
Article theδέbut, on the otheπρόβατονa sheep
ὅς
καίand, even, also,ἐνεἰμίI am, exist
χρείαneed, necessity, bus
οὐNegαὐτόςὅς
ἔχωhaving709×
what comes after →
Article the
ἑπτάIndecυἱόςa son, descendenδέbut, on the othe
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegὅς
ἐν
Article theἑαυτοῦΧριστόςanointed, the Me
οὖςthe ear
ἀκούωI hear, listen
ἐξουσίαpower, authority, we
Article theἀλλάbut, exceptἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, p

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔχω · 709× in the New Testament
Revelation John Luke Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Acts Hebrews 1 John Romans 2 Corinthians 1 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 11c. AD 40

ἀπεριμάχητον δὲ δόγμα καὶ ἀνωφελὲς ἀναρχίαν ὡς ἐν πόλει κατασκευάζον τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ τὸν ἔφορον ἢ βραβευτὴν ἢ δικαστὴν οὐκ ἔχοντι, ὑφ’ οὗ πάντ’ οἰκονομεῖσθαι καὶ πρυτανεύεσθαι θέμις.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Gen. 1 20Pathyris110 BC

ἔτους η Μεχεὶρ β, ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῆι κάτω

P.Bad. 2 3Pathyris110 BC

Μεχεὶρ β ἐν Παθύρει ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῇ κάτω

P.Adl. 4Ptolemais (Oberägypten)110 BC

Ψεμμῖνις … ου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου χαίρειν. ὁμολογῶ ἔχειν παρὰ σοῦ χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα τρῖα ἄτοκα ?. ταῦτα δέ ἐστιν ἃ προσωφείλετό σοι

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
πωλησάτωpōleō he should sell G4453 Verb · future · active · indicative · third person · singular
22× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to sell something, like a merchant selling goods. It appears in Matthew 21:12 and Revelation 13:17, and is used to describe the act of exchanging or bartering something for something else.
Amplified meaning
give up, exchange
Tyndale gloss
to sell
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πωλέω (pōleō) means to sell or barter, derived from a root suggesting trade. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as in Luke 17:28 and Revelation 13:17, often referring to the act of selling goods or property. The lexicons agree on its primary meaning, with no significant disagreement noted.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πωλέω, -ῶ,

[in LXX chiefly for מכר;]

to exchange or barter.

to sell: Lk 17:28, Re 13:17; οἱ πωλοῦντες, Mt 21:12 25:9, Mk 11:15, Lk 19:45; c. acc. rei, Mt 13:44 19:21 21:12, Mk 10:21 11:15, Lk 12:33 18:22 22:36, Jo 2:14, 16, Ac 5:1 (sc. αὐτά, αὐτόν), Ac 4:34, 37. Pass., I Co 10:25; c. gen.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πωλέω, -&; imp. ἐπώλουν; 1 aor. ἐπώλησα ; pres. pass. πωλοῦμαι; (πέλω, πέλομαι, to turn, turn about, [Curtius § 633 p. 470], fr. which [through the noun πωλή; Lod. in Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 57 bot.] πωλοῦμαι, Lat. versor, foll. by εἰς with acc. of place, to frequent a place; ef. the Lat. venio and veneo); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 720; prop. to barter, i. 6. to sell: absol. (opp. to ἀγοράζει), Lk. xvii. 28; Rev. xiii. 17; of πωλοῦντες (opp. to of dyopd¢ovres, buyers), sellers, Mt. xxi. 12; xxv.9; Mk. xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45; with acc. of a thing, Mt. xiii. 44; xix. 21; xxi. 12; Mk. x. 21; xi. 15; Lk. [xii. 33]; xviii. 22; xxii. 36; Jn. ii. 14,16; Acts v.1; supply αὐτόν, Acts iv. 37; αὐτά, ib. 34; pass. 1 Co. x. 25; with a gen. of price added, Mt. x. 29; Lk. xii. 6.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πωλέω. From meaning originally ‘‘put up for sale’’ (sendzfo) πωλέω came to mean simply ‘‘sell” (endo). This later sense, which alone is found in the NT, can be fully illustrated from the papyri, e.g. PSI IV. 3567 (B.c. 253-2) οὐθεὶς οὖν ἐν τοῖς τόποις πωλεῖ πρὸς σῖτον, ἀλλὰ πρὸς ἀργύριον, P Ryl LL. 1138 (Δ.1.133) μόλις πάντα τὰ ἐμαυτοῦ πωλήσας ἐδυνήθην πληρῶσαι, “I was with difficulty able to complete this by selling all my property ” (cf. Mk τοῦ), P Oxy III. 49428 (a Will—A.p. 156) ἐξέστω 80 αὐτῆς πωλεῖν καὶ ὑποτίθεσθαι ἃ ἐὰν aipfrat, ‘‘she shall have the right to ell or mortgage on her own authority whatever she chooses, "ἢ 76. VI. 03219 (late ii/A.D.) τὰ χοιρίδια χωρὶς μοῦ μὴ πώλι, “do not sell the young pigs without me,” P Tebt IT. 4215 (iii/A.p.) (= Se/ections, p. 106) θέλις αὐτὸ πωλῆσαι], πώλησον, ‘if you wish to sell it, sell it,” and P Oxy I. 83} (A.D. 327), where an egg-seller…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πωλέω (pōleō) — to sell.

πωλ-έω,

Ionic dialectimperfect πωλέεσκε [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future -ήσω[Refs 5th c.BC+]; Doric dialect 3rd.pers. plural πωλησεῦντι [Refs 1st c.AD+]: aorist ἐπώλησα [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—passive, future in middle form πωλήσεται [Refs 4th c.BC+] future πεπωλήσεται [Refs 4th c.BC+]: aorist ἐπωλήθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—sell or offer for sale, opposed to ὠνεῖσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to ἀποδίδοσθαι (of the actual sale), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μετ᾽ ἀβακίου καὶ τραπεζίου π. ἑαυτόν sell oneself across the counter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] sold at a high price for exportation to Sardis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πωλέω οὐδενὸς χρήματος refuse to sell it at any price, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ σφῶν αὐτῶν μικροῦ λήμματος π. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἔρωμαι ὁπόσου πωλε; ask what he wants for it, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν Ἀσίην πωλῶ πρὸς μύρα[Refs]; π. τινί τι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τι πρός τινας [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πωλέω

poleo

probably ultimately from pelomai (to be busy, to trade); to barter (as

a pedlar), i.e. to sell:--sell, whatever is sold.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πωλέω

v.

I sell

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πωλέω pōleō 22x

to sell, Mt. 10:29; 13:44

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πωλέω πωλέω,

to exchange or barter goods, to sell or offer for sale, Hdt., attic; c. gen. pretii, ἐς Σάρδις χρημάτων μεγάλων π. to sell at a high price for exportation to Sardis, Hdt.; ἐπώλεε οὐδενὸς χρήματος refused to sell it at any price, id. Hdt.; ἐρέσθαι ὁπόσου πωλεῖ to ask what he wants for it, Xen.; absol., π. πρός τινα to deal with one, Ar.

π. τέλη to let out the taxes, Lat. locare, Aeschin.

to sell, i. e. give up, betray, Dem.:—of persons, to be bought and sold, Ar.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-FAI-3S — Verb · future · active · indicative · third person · singular
future active indicative — an action still to come.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-FAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Future Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
41%selling
selling41% · 9×do sell18% · 4×having sold5% · 1×sold5% · 1×being sold5% · 1×sell5% · 1×sold?5% · 1×he sells5% · 1×other renderings14% · 3×

22 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb91%adverbial9%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 22 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καθέδραa seat, chairἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, pπᾶςall, the whole,
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
ὅσοςμήNeg
ἀσσάριονa small coin
στρουθίονa small bird, sp
καίand, even, also, nam
ὑπάγωI go away, depar
ὑπάγωI go away, depart
εἰμίI am, exist
πωλέωhe should sell22×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀγοράζωI buyεἷςoneδίδωμιI offer, give
Article the
περιστεράa doveὑπάρχωI am, exist, am ἱμάτιονouter garment
φέρωI carry, bear, bring
Article the
ὅσος
ἔχωI have, hold, po
σύ
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπωλέω · 22× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Revelation
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 8 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Cherubim 122c. AD 40

οἱ μὲν γὰρ διδόντες, ἀμοιβὴν ἔπαινον ἢ τιμὴν θηρώμενοι, ζητοῦντες χάριτος ἀντίδοσιν, εὐπρεπεῖ δωρεᾶς ὀνόματι κυρίως πρᾶσιν ἐργάζονται, ἐπεὶ καὶ τοῖς πωλοῦσιν ἀνθ’ ὧν ἂν παράσχωσιν ἔθος λαμβάνειν ἐστίν·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.39c. AD 75–95

Ἰώσηπον δὲ πωλούμενον ὑπὸ τῶν ἐμπόρων ὠνησάμενος Πετεφρὴς ἀνὴρ Αἰγύπτιος ἐπὶ τῶν Φαραώθου μαγείρων τοῦ βασιλέως εἶχεν ἐν πάσῃ τιμῇ καὶ παιδείαν τε τὴν ἐλευθέριον ἐπαίδευε καὶ διαίτῃ χρῆσθαι κρείττονι τῆς ἐπὶ δούλῳ τύχης ἐπέτρεπεν ἐγχειρίζει τε τὴν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Mich. 10 583Bakchias (Arsinoites)AD 78

καὶ εἰσοδεύοντας καὶ ἐξοδεύοντας καὶ κατασπῶντας καὶ ἀνοικοδομοῦντας ἐν αὐτοῖς ὡς ἐὰν αἱρῶνται ἔτι πωλοῦντας ὑποτιθέντας ἑτέροις μεταδιοικοῦντας χρωμένους αὐτοῖς καθʼ ὃν ἐὰν βούλωνται τρόπον ἀπαραποδίστως, καὶ πρὸς τὰ

P.Mich. 10 584Bakchias (Arsinoites)AD 84

ἐν αὐτοῖς ἃ ἐὰν βούλωνται καὶ ἐνοικοῦντας καὶ ἐνοικίζοντας καὶ τὰ ἐνοίκια ἀποφερομένους καὶ πωλοῦντας καὶ ὑποτιθέντας καὶ οἰκονομοῦντας περὶ αὐτῶν καθʼ ὃν ἐὰν αἱρῶνται τρόπον ἀπαραποδίστως. ἐνμενέτωσαν οὖν

P.Mil.Vogl. 1 23Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 108

ἕκαστος ἐπανείρηται καὶ τὰ ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος ιβ ἔτους περιεσόμενα ἀποφερομένους καὶ πωλοῦντας καὶ ὑποτιθεμένους καὶ οἰκονομοῦντας περὶ αὐτῶν, ὡς ἐὰν αἱρώμεθα, καὶ … αρεξεσθαι ἐφʼ ἃ

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
τὸho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASN — Article · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
ἱμάτιονhimation cloak G2440 Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
60× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Clothing refers to the clothes we wear. In the Bible, it can be an outer garment like a cloak or mantle, as seen in Matthew 9:16 and 20-21. It's what we put on our bodies.
Amplified meaning
outer garment, mantle
Tyndale gloss
clothing
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἱμάτιον (himation) refers to an outer garment or cloak, derived from the word for clothing, εἷμα. It is used in the New Testament to describe various types of garments, often contrasting with the inner tunic, χιτών. Key verses include Matthew 5:40 and Mark 5:27. The plural form can refer to garments in general.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἱμάτιον, -ου, τό

(dim. of εἷμα, a garment),

[in LXX chiefly for בֶּגֶד, also for שִׂמְלָה, שַׂלְמָה, etc.;]

a garment, but in usage always (exc. in p1., v. infr.) of an outer garment, a mantle, cloak (thrown over the χιτών; v. Rutherford, NPhr., 22; DCG, i, 499a): Mt 9:16, 20, 21, Mk 2:21 5:27, 28, 30, Jo 19:2, Ac 12:8, al.; opp. to χιτών, Mt 5:40, Lk 6:29, Ac 9:39; pl., garments, clothes (i.e. the cloak and the tunic), Mt 17:2 26:65 27:31, 35,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἱμάτιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of tua i. 4. εἷμα, an article of clothing, garment; and this fr. ἔννυμι to clothe, cf. Germ. Hemd); [fr. Hdt. down]; Sept. mostly for 733, also for τ γον, 705, ete.; 1. a garment (of any sort): Mt. ix. 16; xi. 8 [RG Lbr., al. om.; ef. W. 591 (550) ; B. 82 (72)]; Mk. ii. 21; xv. 20; Lk. v. 36; vii. 25; Heb. i. 11; plur. garments, i. e. the cloak or mantle and the tunic [cf. W. 176 (166); B. 24 (23)]: Mt. xvii. 2; xxiv. 18 [Rec.]; xxvii. 31,35; Jn. xix. 23; Acts vii. 58; Jas. vy. 2, ete.; to rend ra ip. (see διαρρήγνυμι), Mt. xxvi. 65; Acts xiv. 14; xxii. 23. 2. the upper garment, the cloak or mantle (which was thrown over the tunic, 6 χιτών) (Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 22]: Mt. ix. 20; [xxiv. 18 LT Tr WH]; Mk. v. 27; Lk. viii. 44; Jn. xix. 2; Rey. xix. 16; it is distinguished from the χιτών in Mt. v.40; ΓΚ. vi. 29; [cf. Jn. xix. 23]; Actsix.39. [CE. Trench 81].…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἱμάτιον. The plural is used = “‘ garments’’ generally, as in Mk 5%°, in the marriage contract P Ryl IT. 1548 (a.p. 66) ἱμα[τίω]ν o[r]oda[s] δύο, λευκὴι pla [ναρ]κ[ι]σσίνη μία, kal πάλλ[ι]α πέντε, ‘in raiment two robes, one white, one narcissus, and five mantles ” (Edd.): cf. PSI I. 9418 (ii/a.D.) μὴ ἀγωνία δὲ περὶ τῶν ἱματίων. In P Lille I. 6° (iii/B.c.) the ἱμάτιον is distinguished from the inner χιτών in the account of a robbery—e§éSuoayv χιτῶνα ἄξιον (δραχμὰς) 5, ἱμάτιον τριβακὸν (‘‘smooth,” “δης᾽)) ἄξιον (δραχμὰς) §: cf. P Par 59. (B.C.160) πέπρακα τὸ ὀθόνιον (δραχμῶν) ᾧ καὶ τὸ εἷμάτιον (δραχμῶν) Tr. The weaving of the χιτώνιον and ἱμάτιον is mentioned in P Lond 429% 41 (c. a.D. 350) (= II. p- 315) ‘‘ probably a religious ceremony, ’’ according to the editor, ‘‘like the weaving of the peplos at Athens.” exx. of the word are P Petr II. 32 (1)18 ἱμάτια Αἰγύπτια, P Fay 129 ((. B.c.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἱμάτιον (himation) — clothing.

ἱμάτιον [ῑμᾰ-], τό,

in form a diminutive of ἷμα (i.e. εἷμα), a piece of dress; in usage always of an outer garment, formed by an oblong piece of cloth worn above the χιτών, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θοἰμάτιον by crasis for τὸ ἱμ-, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the Roman toga, [Refs 1st c.AD+], of civilians,= togati, [Refs]; but ἱ. Ἑλληνικόν, opposed to the toga, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. ἱμάτια, τά, generally, clothes, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; of grave-clothes, ἐν εἱμ. τρισὶ [θάπτειν] [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. metaphorically, ἱμάτια πόλεως τείχη [Refs]

II. generally, cloth, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 1st c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἱμάτιον

himation

neuter of a presumed derivative of ennumi (to put on); a dress (inner

or outer):--apparel, cloke, clothes, garment, raiment, robe, vesture.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἱμάτιον, ου, τό

n.n.

outer garment

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἱμάτιον himation 60x

a garment; the upper garment, mantle, Mt. 5:40; 9:16, 20, 21; pl. the mantle and tunic together, Mt. 26:65; pl. genr. garments, raiment, Mt. 11:8; 24:18

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἱμάτιον in form a Dim. of ἷμα, i.e. εἷμα an outer garment, a cloak or mantle worn above the χιτών, the same as Homer's χλαῖνα, Hdt., Ar.:—used of the Roman toga, ἐν ἱματίοις, Lat. togati, Plut.

ἱμάτια, τά, generally, clothes, Hdt., Dem.

generally, a cloth, Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASN — Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Cloak

An upper garment, “an exterior tunic, wide and long, reaching to the ankles, but without sleeves” (Isa. 59:17). The word so rendered is elsewhere rendered “robe” or “mantle.” It was worn by the high priest under the ephod (Ex. 28:31), by kings and others of rank (1 Sam. 15:27; Job 1:20; 2:12), and by women (2 Sam. 13:18).

The word translated “cloke”, i.e., outer garment, in Matt. 5:40 is in its plural form used of garments in general (Matt. 17:2; 26:65). The cloak mentioned here and in

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Paul's, left at Troas 2Ti 4:13

→ FIGURATIVE Joh 15:22; 1Pe 2:16

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
49%garments
garments49% · 31×garment14% · 9×cloak11% · 7×clothing11% · 7×cloaks6% · 4×robe5% · 3×other renderings3% · 2×

63 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object70%adverbial17%subject8%second object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 60 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςκράσπεδονthe fringe, edgeκαίand, even, also,
ἐπί
ἄγναφοςunshrunken, newἐπιράπτωI sew onἐπιβάλλωI throw upon, la
καίand, even, also, nam
κεφαλήthe headχιτώνa tunic, garmentπλουτέωI become rich
ὡςas, like as, how, wh
πᾶςall, the whole, αὐτός
ἐν
περιβάλλωI cast around, c
ἱμάτιονcloak60×
what comes after →
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,βάλλωI cast, throw, rσῴζωI save, heal
καίand, even, also, nam
χείρωνworseἐπικαθίζωI sit uponArticle the
παλαιόςold, ancient, worn o
εἰCondαἴρωI raise, lift up
λευκόςwhite, bright
καίand, even, also,ἵναin order that, s
ἑαυτοῦ
ἐνἀναπηδάωI leap into, rus

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἱμάτιον · 60× in the New Testament
Matthew Mark Luke Acts Revelation John Hebrews 1 Peter James
Across the New Testament9 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 120 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.239c. AD 40

πλὴν οὐκ ἀφίσταται ζυγομαχοῦσα ἡ ἡδονή, ἀλλὰ τῶν ἱματίων λαβομένη φησί „Κοιμήθητι μετ’ ἐμοῦ“.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.54c. AD 75–95

ὡς δʼ ἐξέφυγεν ὑπὸ ὀργῆς ὁ Ἰώσηπος προσκαταλιπὼν καὶ τὸ ἱμάτιον, κατεχούσης καὶ γὰρ αὐτὸν ἐκ τούτου μεθεὶς ἐξεπήδησε τοῦ δωματίου, περιδεὴς γενομένη, μὴ κατείπῃ πρὸς τὸν ἄνδρα αὐτῆς, καὶ τῆς ὕβρεως περιαλγῶς ἔχουσα φθάσαι καταψεύσασθαι πρὸς τὸν…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 3.4c. AD 100

τότε ῥαγήσεται πρώϊμον τὸ φῶς σου, καὶ τὰ ἱμάτιά σου ταχέως ἀνατελεῖ, καὶ προπορεύσεται ἔμπροσθέν σου ἡ δικαιοσύνη, καὶ ἡ δόξα τοῦ θεοῦ περιστελεῖ σε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 3 59469276 BC–227 BC

ὑπόμνημα Ζήνωνι παρὰ Μηνοδώρου. ἀγοράσαι ἱμάτιον καὶ χιτωνάριον, μάλιστα μὲν ἐὰν παραπίπτηι χειριδωτόν, εἰ δὲ μή, τῶν … ερων. εἰ

λ δραχμαὶ λζ τριώβολον, χιτὼν γυναικεῖος δραχμαὶ μ, ποδείων ζεῦγος α δραχμαὶ δ· Κόνωνος ἱμάτιον δραχμαὶ κε. ἔτους λϛ, Δίου δ. Ἀπολλωνίου κεράμια σκ· Χαριδήμου καυνάκαι β πο μναῖ

ποτήριον χαλκοῦν, σκάφιον, κόνδυ, ἵνιον, χιτὼν παιδικός, ἐριᾶ ἐντύλη πόκων λε, σακκοπήρα ἐν ἧι ἱμάτιον, χλαμύς, λυχνία, ταπίδιον πυρρὸν καὶ ἱδρῶια καινὰ γ, ἄλλα ἱδρῶια παλαιὰ ϛ ὧν στρογγύλα

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
αὐτοῦautos of him G846 Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-GSM — Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-GSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςof him5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
ἀγορασάτωagorazō he should buy G59 Verb · future · active · indicative · third person · singular
30× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To buy or purchase something, often used to describe redemption, as in Matthew 13:44 and Revelation 3:18, where it refers to buying back or redeeming something.
Amplified meaning
acquire, purchase, for protection, for defense
Tyndale gloss
to buy
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀγοράζω (i.e., *agorazō*) means to buy or purchase, particularly in a market context. It can also imply redeeming or acquiring something at a price. In the New Testament, it appears in various forms, such as in Matthew 21:12 and Revelation 5:9, where it conveys both literal and metaphorical meanings of buying or redeeming.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀγοράζω

(< ἀγορά),

[in LXX chiefly for שׁבר, קנה;]

to frequent the ἀγορά (Hdt., al.).

to buy in the market, purchase (Xen., al.; LXX; in π. very common in deeds of sale, v. MM, VGT, s.v.): absol., Mt 21:12, Mk 11:15; c. acc. rei, Mt 13:44, 46, al.; seq. παρά, c. gen. pers., Re 3:18 (LXX, Polyb.); ἐκ, Mt 27:7; c. gen. pret., Mk 6:37, al.; metaph., I Co 6:20 7:23, II Pe 2:1, Re 5:9 14:3…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀγοράζω ; [impf. ἠγόραζον ; fut. ἀγοράσω] ; 1 aor. ἦγόpaca; Pass., pf. ptep. ἠγορασμένος ; 1 20r. ἠγοράσθην; (ἀγορά); 1. to frequent the market-place. 2. to buy (properly, in the market-place), [Arstph., Xen., al.]; used a. literally: absol.. Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45 [not G T Tr WH]; τί, Mt. xiii. 44, 46; xiv. 15 and parallel pass., Jn. iv. 8; vi.5; with παρά and gen. of the pers. fr. whom, Rev. iii. 18, [Sept., Polyb.]; ἐκ and gen. of price, Mt. xxvii. 7; simple gen. of price, Mk. vi. 37. b. figuratively: Christ is said . to have purchased his disciples i. e. made them, as it were, his private property, 1 Co. vi. 20 [this is commonly understood of God; but cf. Jn. xvii. 9,10]; 1 Co. vii. 23 (with gen. of price added; see τιμή, 1); 2 Pet. ii. 1. He is also said to have bought them for God ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ, by shedding his blood, Rev. v. 9; they, too, are spoken of as…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀγοράζω. The verb (MGr = “‘ buy ”) is common in deeds of sale, e. g. P Lond 882*4 (z.c. 101) (= III. p. 14) ἣν ἠγόρασεν παρὰ O., 26. 1208) (8.6, 97) (=IIT. p. 19). It is used of the purchase of slaves in OG/S 33878 (the will of Attalus II1.—B.c. 133): cf. 1 Cor 650, 7% τιμῆς ἠγοράσθητε (Deissmann LA Z, Ρ. 328). So P Oxy VIII. 11495 ff. (ii/a.p.) ἀ[γο]ράσαι παρὰ Tacap[a]mlwvos ὃν ἔχει δοῦλον Σαραπίωνα, ‘to buy from Tasarapion her slave Sarapion,” a/. Both the verb and the corresponding substantive are found in P Oxy II. 2051). 48, a long letter by a tax-collector of i/A.D., στατῆρας πορφύ[ρ]ας ἀγόρασον . . . ἐὰν εὕρῃς ἀγ[οἱραστὴν τοῦ μέρ[ους] τῆς οἰκίας. For ἀγοραστός, see also P Petr II. 2011. 5,8 (B.C, 252) τοῦ ἀγοραστοῦ = ‘‘(wheat) for sale,” and P Tebt I. 301! (A.p. 123) (= Se/ectrons, p. 78) ἀγοραστὴν παρὰ Θενπετεσούχον . . . οἰκίαν, “the house as purchased from Thenpetesuchus,” αὐ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀγοράζω (agorazō) — to buy.

ἀγοράζω [ᾰγ],

future άσω [LXX+5th c.BC+]: aorist ἠγόρασα[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἠγόρακα[Refs 4th c.BC+]:—middle, aorist ἠγορασάμην[Refs 4th c.BC+]perfect ἠγόρασμαι (see. below):—passive, aorist ἠγοράσθην[Refs]: perfect ἠγόρασμαι[Refs 4th c.BC+]:—frequent the ἀγορά, αἱ γυναῖκες ἀ. καὶ καπηλεύουσι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; occupy the market-place, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. buy in the market, πωλεῖν ἀ.[Refs 5th c.BC+]; generally, buy, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; farm taxes or state-contracts, ὠνὴν ἀ.[Refs]:—middle, buy for oneself, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, διάτινος ἀ.[Refs 4th c.BC+]: perfect passive in middle sense, ἀντὶ τοῦ ἠγοράσθαι αὐτοῖς τὸν οἶνον[Refs]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀγοράζω

agorazo

from 58; properly, to go to market, i.e. (by implication) to purchase;

specially, to redeem:--buy, redeem.

see GREEK for 58

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀγοράζω

v.

I buy

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀγοράζω agorazō 30x

to buy; redeem, acquire by a ransom or price paid

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀγοράζω (also in mid. sense); to be in the ἀγορά, frequent it, Hdt.: to occupy the market-place, Thuc.

to buy in the market, buy, purchase, Ar., Xen.; Mid. to buy for oneself, id. Xen., etc.

as a mark of idle fellows, to lounge in the ἀγορά, Thuc.; cf. ἀγοραῖος.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-FAI-3S — Verb · future · active · indicative · third person · singular
future active indicative — an action still to come.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-FAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Future Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
13%buying
buying13% · 4×buy10% · 3×they may buy10% · 3×you were bought6% · 2×having bought6% · 2×redeemed6% · 2×buys6% · 2×do buy6% · 2×other renderings35% · 11×

31 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 18 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb97%adverbial3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 30 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἔχωI have, hold, poπωλέωI sellαὐτός
Article the
καίand, even, also,χιλιάςa thousand
κώμηa village
Article theκαίand, even, also,
αὐτός
δέbut, on the othe
λαμβάνωI receive, take
δέbut, on the othe
ἀγοράζωhe should buy30×
what comes after →
ἑαυτοῦ
βρῶμαfood of any kindτίςIrg
Article the
ἀγρόςa field, the couθεόςGod, a god
αὐτός
δεσπότηςa lord, master,
ἐν
Article the
ἀπό
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀγοράζω · 30× in the New Testament
Matthew Revelation Luke Mark 1 Corinthians John 2 Peter
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 14 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 12.175c. AD 75–95

Ἐνστάσης δὲ τῆς ἡμέρας, καθʼ ἣν ἔμελλεν τὰ τέλη πιπράσκεσθαι τῶν πόλεων, ἠγόραζον οἱ τοῖς ἀξιώμασιν ἐν ταῖς πατρίσιν διαφέροντες.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 32Pathyris102 BC

γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἄρουραν α, ὧν αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ τῆς προκειμένης συνγραφῆς, ἣν ἠγόρασεν παρὰ Πετεαρσεμθέως τοῦ Πανεβχούνιος πρὸς χαλκοῦ τάλαντα β, τέλος Ασ, γίνονται χαλκοῦ δραχμαὶ Ασ.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

παστοφορίου ἐντὸς τοῦ περιβόλου τοῦ ἐπιβάλλοντος αὐτῶι μέρους τετάρτου, ὧν αἱ γειτνίαι δεδηλῶνται, ὃν ἠγόρασεν παρὰ Νεχούτου τοῦ Σχώτου ἱερέως Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης χαλκοῦ Γ, τέλος τ. Παγκράτης.

P.Grenf. 2 36Pathyris96 BC

τὸν μῦν καταβεβρωκέναι τὸν σπόρον. καλῶς ἡμῖν ὦδε, ἢ ἐν Διοσπόλει ἐὰν αἱρῆσθε, πυρὸν ἀγοράσαι ἥκετε. τὰ δʼ ἄλλα χαρίζοισθʼ ἑαυτῶν ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε. ἔρρωται Ὧρος καὶ Πετοσῖρις. ἔρρωσθε.

He said then to them; But now the [one] having a purse he should take [it], likewise also a bag; and the [one] not having he should sell the cloak of him and he should buy a sword.
μάχαιραν.machaira a sword. G3162 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
29× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for a short sword or dagger, used in the Bible for a knife or sword. It appears in Matthew 26:47 and John 18:10, describing a weapon used by Jesus' disciples.
Amplified meaning
short sword, dagger
Tyndale gloss
sword
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μάχαιρα (machaira) refers to a large knife or dagger, often used for sacrificial purposes or as a weapon. It is distinguished from larger swords and is mentioned in various New Testament contexts, such as in Matthew 26:47 and Acts 12:2. The term can also metaphorically represent war or conflict, as seen in Matthew 10:34. There is some variation in the forms of the word used in different texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μάχαιρα, -ης

(Att. -ας; v. WH, App., 156a; Bl., § 7, 1), ἡ,

[in LXX chiefly for חֶרֶב; also for מַאֲכֶלֶת, etc.;]

(in Hom., al.) a large knife or dirk, for sacrificial purposes (Ge 22:6, 10, Jg 19:29 A).

a short sword or dagger (as disting. from ῥομφαία, a large broad sword and ξίφος, a straight sword for thrusting): Mt 26:47 ff., Mk 14:43, 47, 48, Lk 22:36 ff., Jo 18:10, 11 Ac 16:27, He 11:37, Re 6:4 13:10, 14; στόμα μαχαίρης (as in…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μάχαιρα, cen. -as [so (with RG) Lehm. in Lk. xxi. 24] and -ns, dat. -a [so (with R G) Lehm. in Lk. xxii. 49; Acts xii. 2] and -y (betw. which forms the codd. vary, ef. [Serivener, Collation, ete. p. lvi.; ΤῸ Proleg. p. 117; WH. App. p- 1561; W. 62 (61); B.11; Delitzsch on Heb. xb 34 p. 584 note), ἡ, (akin to μάχη and Lat. mactare); 1. a large knife, used for killing animals and cutting up flesh: Hom., Pind., Hdt., al.; hence Gen. xxii. 6,10; Judg. xix. 29 Alex.,for NN. 2. asmall sword, distinguished fr. the large sword, the ῥομφαία (Joseph. antt. 6, 9, 5 ἀποτέμνει THY κεφαλὴν τῇ ῥομφαίᾳ τῇ ἐκείνου (Goliath’s), μάχαιραν οὐκ ἔχων αὐτός), and curved, for a cutting stroke; distinct also fr. ξίφος, a straight sword, for thrusting, Xen. r. eq. 12, 11, cf. Hell. 3, 3, 7; but the words are freq. used interchangeably. Inthe N. T. univ. α sword (Sept. often for 29m) : as a weapon for making or…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μάχαιρα. In Ptolemaic papyri the usual forms of the gen. and dat. of this common noun are μαχαίρας, μαχαίρᾳ, e.g. P Par 1215 | (B.C. 157) σπασάμενος λέπει pe τῇ μαχαίρᾳ εἰς Td σκέλος, | and thesame holds generally true of the LXX (cf. Thackeray Gr. i. p. 141f., Helbing Gr. p. 31 ff.). In the NT only μαχαίρης, μαχαίρῃ, are found, and are normal in papyri of the Roman period. For an ex. from an earlier date see P | Tebt I. 16 (Β. 6. 114) ἐν μαχαίρηι ‘armed with a sword ” (for instrumental ἐν cf. 1 Cor 42! and the editors’ note). See further Moulton Pro/eg. pp. 38, 48, and Gr. ii. p. 118. We | may add as further illustrating the word P Tebt I. 48? (c, B.C, 113) σπασαμένων tas μαχαίρας, and P Ryl II. 256% (i/B.c.) where a young man complains that he has been deprived οἵ --πατ]ρικὴν στρατιωτικὴν μάχαιραν, which he had inherited. In Lk 228 Field (Wo/es, p. 76 f.) suggests as an alternative…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μάχαιρα (machaira) — sword.

μάχαιρ-α [μᾰ], ας

(later -ης, dative -ῃ, [NT+2nd c.BC+], ἡ, large knife or dirk, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; carving-knife, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; sacrificial knife, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —ἡ Δελφικὴ μ. a knife adapted to various purposes, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see at {Δελφικὴ μ}.; proverbial, of greedy persons, because Delphian sacrificers claimed a share for the knife, [Refs]

2. as a weapon, short sword, dagger, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; used by jugglers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; later, sabre, opposed to the straight sword (ξίφος), [NT+5th c.BC+]; οἱ ἐπὶ τῆς μ., of a bodyguard, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; but, ἐπὶ μ. τασσόμενοι possessing power of life and death (jus gladii), Cat.Codex Astr.[Refs]; μ. ἱππική cavalry sabre, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

μάχαιρα

machaira

probably feminine of a presumed derivative of 3163; a knife, i.e.

dirk; figuratively, war, judicial punishment:--sword.

see GREEK for 3163

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μάχαιρα, ας, ἡ

n.f.

a sword

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μάχαιρα machaira 29x

a large knife, dagger; a sword, Mt. 26:47, 51; the sword of the executioner, Acts 12:2; Rom. 8:35; Heb. 11:37; hence, φορεῖν μάχαιραν, to bear the sword, to have the power of life and death, Rom. 13:4; meton. war, Mt. 10:34

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μάχαιρα μάχαιρα, ἡ, μάχομαι a large knife or dirk, worn by the heroes of the Iliad next the sword-sheath, Il.: generally, a knife for cutting up meat, Hdt., attic

as a weapon, a short sword or dagger, Hdt., etc.: a sabre or bent sword, opp. to the straight sword (ξίφος), Xen.

a kind of rasor, μιᾷ μαχαίρᾳ with the rasor's single blade, opp. to διπλῆ μ. scissars, Ar.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

sord.

See ARMOR, III, 5.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Sword

Of the Hebrew was pointed, sometimes two-edged, was worn in a sheath, and suspended from the girdle (Ex. 32:27; 1 Sam. 31:4; 1 Chr. 21:27; Ps. 149:6: Prov. 5:4; Ezek. 16:40; 21:3-5).

It is a symbol of divine chastisement (Deut. 32:25; Ps. 7:12; 78:62), and of a slanderous tongue (Ps. 57:4; 64:3; Prov. 12:18). The word of God is likened also to a…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

[ARMS, ARMOR]

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Used by

Gideon Jud 7:20

Goliath 1Sa 21:9

Peter Mt 26:51; Joh 18:10

→ David' s army equipped with 1Ch 21:5

→ To be beaten into plowshares Isa 2:4; Mic 4:3

→ Made of plowshares Joe 3:10

→ Two-edged Heb 4:12; Re 1:16; 2:12

→ FIGURATIVE

Of war Ge 27:40

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
69%sword
sword69% · 20×swords21% · 6×sword?7% · 2×the sword3% · 1×

29 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object45%adverbial35%subject17%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 29 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
σπάωI draw (as a swoἀποσπάωI wrench away frἀποστρέφωI turn away, res
μετά
ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oπολύςmuch, many, ofteὄχλοςa crowd
ἐν
μάχαιραa swordπατάσσωI strikeτὶς
στόμαthe mouth, speech
πίπτωI fall, fall undφεύγωI flee, escape,
ἀλλάbut, except
εἰρήνηpeace, peace of
μάχαιραa sword.29×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
ξύλονa staff, cross, αἰχμαλωτίζωI take captive, ζάωI live
ἀποκτείνωI put to death, kill
δεῖit is necessary,ὧδεhere
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,
σύ
εἰς
ἐν
μάχαιραa sword

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμάχαιρα · 29× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke Revelation Hebrews Mark Acts John Romans Ephesians
Across the New Testament9 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 132 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.26c. AD 40

τὰ δὲ Σίκιμα ὁ Ἰακὼβ λαμβάνει οὐ παρὰ θεοῦ, ἀλλ’ „ἐν μαχαίρᾳ καὶ τόξοις“, λόγοις τμητικοῖς καὶ ἀμυντηρίοις·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 6.190c. AD 75–95

δραμὼν δʼ ἐφίσταται τῷ πολεμίῳ κειμένῳ καὶ τῇ ῥομφαίᾳ τῇ ἐκείνου μάχαιραν οὐκ ἔχων αὐτὸς ἀποτέμνει τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ.

Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 6.4.1c. AD 110

τί δὲ καὶ ἑαυτὸν ἔκδοτον δέδωκα τῷ θανάτῳ, πρὸς πῦρ, πρὸς μάχαιραν, πρὸς θηρία;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. BC 3rd c. BC 5th c. AD 1st c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Köln 11 455Aphroditopolis (Arsinoites)135 BC

οἰκίαν, ὁ δὲ Μαρρῆς … … α ἐλιθοβόλει ἡμᾶς. … όδρων Ὥρου καὶ σπασάμενος μάχαιραν κατεδίωκεν ἡμᾶς … ων καὶ οὕτως ἀπηλλα- … σ καὶ Νεφερσοῦχις … δι’ ἧς

P.Tebt. 1 138 descr.Tebtynis (Arsinoites)126 BC–102 BC

ὁ εἷς τῶν προγεγραμμένων Ὀννῶφρις … μενος μοι ἐκεῖνος ἀντιλογίας μάχην ἀνελόμενος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ μάχαιραν καὶ … επιστρέψας καὶ σπασάμενος ταύτην βουλόμενός με ἀλογῆσαι κατήνεγκε πληγαῖς τρισὶ καὶ τὴν

BGU 16 2629Herakleopolites5 BC

φιλτάτωι χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένωι διευτυχεῖν· ἀνοικονομήτως ἀναστραφέντες μέχρι τοῦ νῦν ἐνεπόδισαν τὴν περὶ τῶν μαχαιρῶν ἐπιστολὴν καίπερ ἐπιτεταχότος τοῦ ἡγεμόνος γράψαι πολλαῖς ὁδοῖς χρησάμενοι, πλὴν ἐν τύπωι γέγονε· λοιπόν

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate